rfp for procurement, installation, testing & commissioning ... · rfp for procurement,...

RFP For Procurement, Installation, Testing & Commissioning Of BMS, ACS, Surveillance System, Equipment / Accessories Required for Integration with Existing Setup In GITC

REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL FOR PROCUREMENT, INSTALLATION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING OF

BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM , ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM, SURVEILLANCE (CCTV) SYSTEM, EQUIPMENTS / ACCESSORIES

REQUIRED FOR INTEGRATION WITH EXISTING SETUP IN GLOBAL IT CENTRE (GITC)

Ref: SBI/GITC/DC & BCM/2017-18/456 : 18/12/2017

STATE BANK GLOBAL IT CENTER DC & BCM, 2nd Floor, ‘C’ Wing

Sector – 11 CBD Belapur, Navi Mumbai – 400 614


of 221 SBI/GITC/DC & BCM/2017-18/456 : 18/12/2017 Confidential & Proprietary

Part-1

S.N. Index

1 Invitation to Bid

2 Disclaimer

3 Definitions

4 Scope of work

5 Eligibility and technical criteria

6 Cost of Bid document

7 Clarifications and amendments on RFP/Pre-Bid meeting

8 Contents of Bid documents

9 Earnest Money Deposit (EMD)

10 Bid preparation and submission

11 Deadline for submission of Bids

12 Modification and withdrawal of Bids

13 Period of validity of Bids

14 Bid integrity

15 Bidding process/ opening of technical Bids

16 Technical Evaluation

17 Evaluation of price Bids and Finalization

18 Contacting the Bank

19 Award criteria

20 Power to vary or omit work

21 No waiver of Bank’s rights or successful Bidder’s liability

22 Contract amendment

23 Bank’s right to accept any Bid and to reject any or all Bids

24 Documentary evidence establishing Bidder’s eligibility and qualification

25 Performance Bank Guarantee

26 Country of origin and eligibility of goods & services

27 Delivery, installation, commissioning and documentation

28 System Integration Testing and User Acceptance testing

29 Services

30 Warranty and Annual Maintenance Contract

31 Compliance with IS Security Policy

32 Penalties

33 Right to verification

34 Purchase price

35 Inspection and quality control tests

36 Right to audit

37 Sub-contracting

38 Validity of agreement

39 Limitation of liability

40 Confidentiality

41 Delay in vendor performance

42 Vendor’s obligations

43 Technical documentation

44 Patent/Intellectual Property Rights



45 Liquidated damages

46 Conflict of interest

47 Fraud and corrupt practices

48 Termination for default

49 Force majeure

50 Termination for insolvency

51 Termination for convenience

52 Disputes and arbitration

53 Governing languages

54 Applicable law

55 Taxes and Duties

56 Tax deduction at sources

57 Tender Fee

58 Notices

Annexures

Annexure Details

A Bid covering letter/Bid form on Bidder’s letter head

B Bidder’s Eligibility Criteria

C BOM/BoQ/Technical & Functional Specifications

D Bidder Details

E scope of work

F Indicative Commercial Bid

G Format for EMD Bank Guarantee

H Performance Bank Guarantee

I Certificate of commissioning and Acceptance of Solution

J Penalties & Service Level Agreement

K Non-Disclosure Agreement

L Pre-Bid Query Format

M Undertaking of Authenticity

N Manufacturer’s Authorization Form



1. INVITATION TO BID:

i. State Bank of India (herein after referred to as ‘SBI/the Bank’ is having

its Corporate Centre at Mumbai, various other offices (LHOs/ Head

Offices /Zonal Offices/Global Link Services, Global IT Centre, etc. of State

Bank of India and branches/other offices, other exchange companies in

available at various locations and managed by the Bank (collectively

referred to as State Bank Group or ‘SBG’ hereinafter). This Request for

Proposal (RFP) has been issued by the Bank on behalf of SBG

Procurement, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of Building

Management System (BMS), Access Control System (ACS), Surveillance

(CCTV) System, Equipments / Accessories required for Integration with

existing setup in Global IT Centre (GITC).

ii. In order to meet the Hardware/Solution/Equipment/service requirements,

the Bank proposes to invite tenders from eligible vendors as per

details/scope of work mentioned in Annexure-E of this RFP document.

iii. Bidder shall mean any entity (i.e. juristic person) who meets the eligibility

criteria given in Annexure-B of this RFP and willing to provide the

Hardware/Software Solution/ service as required in this bidding document.

The interested Bidders who agree to all the terms and conditions

contained in this document may submit their Bids with the information

desired in this bidding document (Request for Proposal).

iv. Address for submission of Bids, contact details including email address for

sending communications are given in given in part II of this RFP

document.

v. The purpose of SBI behind this RFP is to seek a detailed technical and

commercial proposal for procurement of the Hardware/Software

Solution/Equipment/ service desired in this document. The proposed

Hardware/Software Solution/ service must integrate with Bank’s existing

infrastructure seamlessly.

vi. This document shall not be transferred, reproduced or otherwise used for

purpose other than for which it is specifically issued.

vii. Interested Bidders are advised to go through the entire document before

submission of Bids to avoid any chance of elimination. The eligible

Bidders desirous of taking up the project for supply of proposed Solution/

service for SBI are invited to submit their technical and commercial

proposal in response to this RFP. The criteria and the actual process of

evaluation of the responses to this RFP and subsequent selection of the



successful Bidder will be entirely at Bank’s discretion. This RFP seeks

proposal from Bidders who have the necessary experience, capability &

expertise to provide SBI the proposed Solution/ service adhering to Bank’s

requirements outlined in this RFP.

2. Disclaimer:

i. The information contained in this RFP document or information provided

subsequently to Bidder(s) whether verbally or in documentary form/email

by or on behalf of State Bank of India (Bank), is subject to the terms and

conditions set out in this RFP document.

ii. This RFP is not an offer by State Bank of India, but an invitation to receive

responses from the eligible Bidders. No contractual obligation whatsoever

shall arise from the RFP process unless and until a formal contract is

signed and executed by duly authorized official(s) of State Bank of India

with the selected Bidder.

iii. The purpose of this RFP is to provide the Bidder(s) with information to

assist preparation of their Bid proposals. This RFP does not claim to

contain all the information each Bidder may require. Each Bidder should

conduct its own investigations and analysis and should check the

accuracy, reliability and completeness of the information contained in this

RFP and where necessary obtain independent advices/clarifications. Bank

may in its absolute discretion, but without being under any obligation to do

so, update, amend or supplement the information in this RFP.

iv. The Bank, its employees and advisors make no representation or

warranty and shall have no liability to any person, including any Applicant

or Bidder under any law, statute, rules or regulations or tort, principles of

restitution or unjust enrichment or otherwise for any loss, damages, cost

or expense which may arise from or be incurred or suffered on account of

anything contained in this RFP or otherwise, including the accuracy,

adequacy, correctness, completeness or reliability of the RFP and any

assessment, assumption, statement or information contained therein or

deemed to form or arising in any way for participation in this bidding

process.

v. The Bank also accepts no liability of any nature whether resulting from

negligence or otherwise, howsoever caused arising from reliance of any

Bidder upon the statements contained in this RFP.

vi. The issue of this RFP does not imply that the Bank is bound to select a

Bidder or to appoint the Selected Bidder or Concessionaire, as the case

may be, for the Project and the Bank reserves the right to reject all or any

of the Bidders or Bids without assigning any reason whatsoever.



vii. The Bidder is expected to examine all instructions, forms, terms and specifications in the bidding Document. Failure to furnish all information required by the bidding Document or to submit a Bid not substantially responsive to the bidding Document in all respect will be at the Bidder’s risk and may result in rejection of the Bid.

3. Definitions: In this connection, the following terms shall be interpreted as indicated below: i. “The Bank” ‘means the State Bank of India (including domestic

branches and foreign offices) and subsidiaries.

ii. “Bidder/Service Provider/System Integrator” means an eligible entity/firm submitting the Bid in response to this RFP.

iii. “Bid” means the written reply or submission of response to this RFP.

iv. “The Contract” means the agreement entered into between the Bank

and the Vendor, as recorded in the Contract Form signed by the parties, including all attachments and appendices thereto and all documents incorporated by reference therein.

v. “Vendor/Service Provider” is the successful Bidder found eligible as

per eligibility criteria set out in this RFP, whose technical Bid has been accepted and who has emerged as L1 Bidder as per the selection criteria set out in the RFP and to whom notification of award has been given by the Bank.

vi. “The Contract Price/Project Cost” means the price payable to the

Vendor under the Contract for the full and proper performance of its contractual obligations.

vii. Hardware/Software Solution/Equipment/Services/ System –

“Software Solution” or “Services” or “System” means all hardware, equipment, software products, services, scope of work and deliverables to be provided by a Bidder as described in the RFP and include services ancillary to the development of the solution, such as installation, commissioning, integration with existing systems, provision of technical assistance, training, certifications, auditing and other obligation of the Vendor covered under the RFP.

viii. Annual Maintenance Contract (AMC) - It would be the annual cost of

maintenance of Hardware/Software Solution / Equipment/Service.

4. Scope of Work:



As given in Annexure-E of this document.

5. Eligibility and Technical Criteria:

i. Bid is open to all Bidders who meet the eligibility and technical criteria as given in Annexure-B & Annexure-C of this document. The Bidder has to submit the documents substantiating eligibility criteria as mentioned in this RFP document.

6. Cost of Bid document:

The participating Bidders shall bear all the costs associated with or

relating to the preparation and submission of their Bids including but not

limited to preparation, copying, postage, delivery fees, expenses

associated with any demonstration or presentations which may be

required by the Bank or any other costs incurred in connection with or

relating to their Bid. The Bank shall not be liable in any manner

whatsoever for the same or for any other costs or other expenses incurred

by a Bidder regardless of the conduct or outcome of the bidding process.

7. Clarification and amendments on RFP/Pre-Bid Meeting

i. Bidder should visit the site during specified days (Point 2a - PART II) for the verification of the BoQ as well as for understanding the requirement /gathering other information like site layout, sketching of drawings for device’s position , cabling etc.

ii. Bidder requiring any clarification of the bidding Document may notify the Bank in writing strictly as per the format given in Annexure-L at the address/by e-mail given in part II of this document within the date/time mentioned in the schedule of events.

iii. A pre-Bid meeting will be held on the date and time specified in the

schedule of events which may be attended by the authorized representatives of the Bidders interested to respond to this RFP.

iv. The queries received (without identifying source of query) and response of

the Bank thereof will be posted on the Bank’s website or conveyed to the Bidders.

v. SBI reserves the right to amend, rescind or reissue the RFP, at any time

prior to the deadline for submission of Bids. The Bank, for any reason,

whether, on its own initiative or in response to a clarification requested by

a prospective Bidder, may modify the bidding Document, by amendment

which will be made available to the Bidders by way of

corrigendum/addendum. The interested parties/Bidders are advised to

check the Bank’s website regularly till the date of submission of Bid

document specified in the schedule of events/email and ensure that



clarifications / amendments issued by the Bank, if any, have been taken

into consideration before submitting the Bid. Such

amendments/clarifications, if any, issued by the Bank will be binding on

the participating Bidders. Bank will not take any responsibility for any such

omissions by the Bidder. SBI, at its own discretion, may extend the

deadline for submission of Bids in order to allow prospective Bidders a

reasonable time to prepare the Bid, for taking the amendment into

account. Nothing in this RFP or any addenda/corrigenda or clarifications

issued in connection thereto is intended to relieve Bidders from forming

their own opinions and conclusions in respect of the matters addresses in

this RFP or any addenda/corrigenda or clarifications issued in connection

thereto.

vi. No request for change in commercial/legal terms and conditions, other

than what has been mentioned in the RFP or any addenda/corrigenda or

clarifications issued in connection thereto, will be entertained and queries

in this regard, therefore will not be entertained.

vii. Queries received after the scheduled date and time will not be

responded/acted upon.

8. Contents of Bidding document:

i. The Bidder must thoroughly study/analyze and properly understand the

contents of this RFP document, its meaning and impact of the information

contained therein.

ii. Failure to furnish all information required in the bidding document or

submission of Bid not responsive to the bidding documents in any respect

will be at the Bidder’s risk and responsibility and the same may finally

result in rejection of its Bid. SBI has made considerable effort to ensure

that accurate information is contained in this RFP and is supplied solely as

guidelines for Bidders.

iii. Nothing in this RFP or any addenda/corrigenda or clarifications issued in

connection thereto, is intended to relieve Bidders from forming their own

opinions and conclusions in respect of the matters contained in RFP and

its addenda, if any.

iv. The Bid prepared by the Bidder, as well as all correspondences and

documents relating to the Bid exchanged by the Bidder and the Bank and supporting documents and printed literature shall be submitted in English.

v. The information provided by the Bidders in response to this RFP will become the property of SBI and will not be returned. Incomplete



information in Bid document may lead to non-consideration of the proposal.

9. Earnest Money Deposit (EMD):

i. The Bidder shall furnish EMD for the amount and validity period

mentioned in Part II of this document.

ii. EMD is required to protect the Bank against the risk of Bidder’s conduct.

iii. The EMD may be in the form of a Demand Draft or Pay Order or Bank

Guarantee [on the lines of Annexure-G], issued by a Scheduled

Commercial Bank in India, other than State Bank of India, drawn in

favour of State Bank of India payable at Mumbai. In case, SBI is the sole

Banker for the Bidder, a Letter of Comfort from SBI would be acceptable.

iv. Any Bid not accompanied by EMD for the specified amount as mentioned

elsewhere in the RFP will be rejected as non-responsive.

v. The EMD of the unsuccessful Bidders shall be returned within 2 weeks

from the date of Bid finalisation.

vi. The EMD of successful Bidder will be discharged upon the Bidder signing

the Contract and furnishing the Performance Bank Guarantee for the amount and validity as mentioned in Part II of this RFP) which should be strictly on the lines of format placed at Annexure-H.

vii. No interest is payable on EMD.

viii. The EMD may be forfeited:-

a) if a Bidder withdraws his Bid during the period of Bid validity specified

in this RFP; or b) if a Bidder makes any statement or encloses any form which turns

out to be false / incorrect at any time prior to signing of Contract; or c) if the successful Bidder fails to sign the contract or furnish

Performance Bank Guarantee, within the specified time period in the RFP/Purchase Order.

ix. If EMD is forfeited for any reasons mentioned above, the concerned

Bidder may be debarred from participating in the RFPs floated by the

Bank/this department, in future, as per sole discretion of the Bank.

10. Bid Preparation and submission:



i. The Bid is to be submitted in two separate envelopes. One of the

envelope is to be prominently marked as ‘Technical Proposal for Procurement, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of BMS, ACS, Surveillance System, Equipment / Accessories required for Integration with Existing Setup In GITC in response to the RFP No. SBI/GITC/DC & BCM/2017-18/456 dated 18/12/2017. This envelope should contain following documents and properly sealed:

(a) Bid covering letter/Bid form on the lines of Annexure-A on Bidder’s

letter head. (b) Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) as specified in this document.

(c) A letter on Bidder’s letter head: -

(i) Mentioning details of EMD submitted, technical competence and

experience of the Bidder

(ii) Certifying that the period of the validity of the Bid is as per terms

of this RFP.

(iii) Confirming that the Bidder has quoted for all the items/services

mentioned in this RFP in their commercial Bid.

(iv) Confirming that they agree with all the terms and conditions

mentioned in the RFP.

(v) Specific response with supporting documents in respect of

Eligibility Criteria as mentioned in Annexure-B and technical

eligibility criteria on the lines of Annexure-C.

(d) Bidder’s details as per Annexure-D on Bidder’s letter head.

(e) Undertaking of Authenticity - Annexure-M

(f) Format for Manufacturer’s Authorization Form– Annexure- P

(g) Bidder should provide licensing details of Software / Database /

Middleware / Operating System / Third Party Software etc

(h) Audited balance sheets and profit and loss account statement for last

three years

(i) A copy of board resolution or power of attorney showing that the

signatory has been duly authorized to sign the Bid document.

(j) Detailed explanation of functioning of Solution.

ii. A second sealed envelope prominently marked as Indicative Price Proposal for Procurement, Installation, Testing & Commissioning Of BMS, ACS, Surveillance System, Equipment / Accessories Required for Integration with Existing Setup In GITC in response to the RFP No. SBI/GITC/DC & BCM/2017-18/456 dated 18/12/2017. This envelope should contain only indicative price Bid strictly on the lines of Annexure-F. The Indicative Price must include all the



price components mentioned. Prices are to be quoted in Indian Rupees only.

iii. Bidders may please note:

a. The Bidder should quote for the entire package on a single responsibility

basis for Solution/ services it proposes to supply.

b. While submitting the Technical Bid, literature on the Solution/ service should be segregated and kept together in one section / lot in a separate envelope.

c. Care should be taken that the Technical Bid shall not contain any price

information. Such proposal, if received, will be rejected.

d. The Bid document shall be complete in accordance with various clauses of the RFP document or any addenda/corrigenda or clarifications issued in connection thereto, duly signed by the authorized representative of the Bidder and stamped with the official stamp of the Bidder. Board resolution authorizing representative to Bid and make commitments on behalf of the Bidder is to be attached.

e. Bids are liable to be rejected if only one (i.e. Technical Bid or Indicative

Price Bid) is received.

f. Prices quoted by the Bidder shall remain fixed for the period specified in part II of this document and shall not be subjected to variation on any account, including exchange rate fluctuations and custom duty. A Bid submitted with an adjustable price quotation will be treated as non-responsive and will be rejected.

g. If deemed necessary the Bank may seek clarifications on any aspect from

the Bidder. However that would not entitle the Bidder to change or cause

any change in the substances of the Bid already submitted or the price

quoted.

h. The Bidder may also be asked to give presentation for the purpose of

clarification of the Bid.

i. The Bidder must provide specific and factual replies to the points raised in

the RFP.

j. The Bid shall be typed or written in indelible ink and shall be signed by the

Bidder or a person or persons duly authorized to bind the Bidder to the Contract.

k. All the enclosures (Bid submission) shall be serially numbered with rubber

stamp of the participating Bidder. The person or persons signing the Bids



shall initial all pages of the Bids, except for un-amended printed literature.

l. Any inter-lineation, erasures or overwriting shall be valid only if they are initialled by the person signing the Bids.

m. The Bid document shall be spirally bound.

n. The Bank reserves the right to reject Bids not conforming to above.

o. The two NON-WINDOW envelopes shall be put together and sealed in an

outer NON-WINDOW envelope.

p. All the envelopes shall be addressed to the Bank and deliver at the address given in Part-II of this RFP and should have name and address of the Bidder on the cover.

q. If the envelope is not sealed and marked, the Bank will assume no

responsibility for the Bid’s misplacement or its premature opening.

11. Deadline for Submission of Bids:

a. Bids must be received by the Bank at the address specified and by the date and time mentioned in the “Schedule of Events”.

b. In the event of the specified date for submission of Bids being declared a

holiday for the Bank, the Bids will be received upto the appointed time on the next working day.

c. In case the Bank extends the scheduled date of submission of Bid

document, the Bids shall be submitted by the time and date rescheduled. All rights and obligations of the Bank and Bidders will remain the same.

d. Any Bid received after the deadline for submission of Bids prescribed, will

be rejected and returned unopened to the Bidder.

12. Modification and Withdrawal of Bids:

a. The Bidder may modify or withdraw its Bid after the Bid’s submission, provided that written notice of the modification, including substitution or withdrawal of the Bids, is received by the Bank, prior to the deadline prescribed for submission of Bids.

b. A withdrawal notice may also be sent by Fax, but followed by a signed

confirmation copy, not later than the deadline for submission of Bids.

c. No modification in the Bid shall be allowed, after the deadline for submission of Bids.

d. No Bid shall be withdrawn in the interval between the deadline for



submission of Bids and the expiration of the period of Bid validity

specified by the Bidder on the Bid Form. Withdrawal of a Bid during

this interval may result in the forfeiture of EMD submitted by the

Bidder

e. Withdrawn Bids, if any, will be returned unopened to the Bidders.

13. Period of Validity of Bids:

a. Bids shall remain valid for 180 days from the date of reverse auction. A

Bid valid for a shorter period is liable to be rejected by the Bank as non-

responsive.

b. In exceptional circumstances, the Bank may solicit the Bidders’ consent

to an extension of the period of validity. The request and the responses

thereto shall be made in writing. A Bidder is free to refuse the request.

However, in such case, the Bank will not forfeit its EMD. However, any

extension of validity of Bids will not entitle the Bidder to revise/modify

the Bid document.

c. The Bank reserves the right to call for fresh quotes at any time during

the Bid validity period, if considered, necessary.

14. Bid integrity:

Willful misrepresentation of any fact within the Bid will lead to the

cancellation of the contract without prejudice to other actions that the

Bank may take. All the submissions, including any accompanying

documents, will become property of SBI. The Bidders shall be deemed to

license, and grant all rights to SBI, to reproduce the whole or any portion

of their product for the purpose of evaluation, to disclose the contents of

submission to other Bidders and to disclose and/ or use the contents of

submission as the basis for RFP process.

15. Bidding process/Opening of Technical Bids:

i. All the technical Bids received up to the specified time and date will

be opened for initial evaluation on the time and date mentioned in

the schedule of events available in part II of this document. The

technical Bids will be opened in the presence of representatives of

the Bidders who choose to attend the same. However, Bids may be

opened even in the absence of representatives of one or more of

the Bidders.



ii. In the first stage, only technical Bid will be opened and evaluated.

Proposals of such Bidders satisfying eligibility criteria and agree to

comply with all the terms and conditions specified in the RFP will

be evaluated for technical criteria/specifications/eligibility. Only

those Bids complied with technical criteria shall become eligible for

commercial Bid opening and further RFP evaluation process.

iii. The Bank will examine the Bids to determine whether they are complete, required formats have been furnished, the documents have been properly signed, EMD for the desired amount and validity period is available and the Bids are generally in order. The Bank may, at its discretion waive any minor non-conformity or irregularity in a Bid which does not constitute a material deviation.

iv. Prior to the detailed evaluation, the Bank will determine the

responsiveness of each Bid to the bidding Document. For purposes of these Clauses, a responsive Bid is one, which conforms to all the terms and conditions of the bidding Document in toto, without any deviation.

v. The Bank’s determination of a Bid’s responsiveness will be based

on the contents of the Bid itself, without recourse to extrinsic evidence.

vi. After opening of the technical Bids and preliminary evaluation,

some or all the Bidders may be asked to make presentations on the complete Solution/service proposed to be offered by them.

vii. If a Bid is not responsive, it will be rejected by the Bank and will not

subsequently be made responsive by the Bidder by correction of the non-conformity.

16. Technical Evaluation:

i. Technical evaluation will include technical information submitted as per technical Bid format, demonstration of proposed Solution/services, reference calls and site visits, wherever required. The Bidder may highlight the noteworthy/superior features of their Solution/ services. The Bidder will demonstrate/substantiate all claims made in the technical Bid to the satisfaction of the Bank, the capability of the Solution/ services to support all the required functionalities at their cost in their lab or those at other organizations where similar Solution/ services is in use.

ii. During evaluation and comparison of Bids, the Bank may, at its discretion ask the Bidders for clarification on the Bids received. The request for clarification shall be in writing and no change in prices or substance of the Bid shall be sought, offered or permitted. No post Bid clarification at the initiative of the Bidder shall be entertained.



v. The evaluation will also take into account: a. Solution/ services offered by the Bidder to any Data Centre in India.

The Bidder should furnish the details.

b. Does the proposed Solution offers a proven solution to meet the

requirements

c. Does the Solution offered by the Bidder is a complete system as a

project and has to be integrated with exiting setup.

d. Bidder support facilities: Support requirement like online support/ email

support/ offline support, time period

17. Evaluation of Price Bids and Finalization:

i. The envelope containing the Commercial Bids of only those Bidders, who

are short-listed after technical evaluation, would be opened.

ii. All the Bidders who qualify in the evaluation process shall have to

participate in the online reverse auction to be conducted by Bank’s

authorized service provider on behalf of the Bank, details of which are

given in Part II of this RFP document.

iii. Shortlisted Bidders shall be willing to participate in the reverse auction

process and must have a valid digital signature certificate. Such Bidders

will be trained by Bank’s authorized service provider for this purpose.

Bidders shall also be willing to abide by the e-business rules for reverse

auction framed by the Bank / Authorised service provider. The details of e-

business rules, processes and procedures will be provided to the short-

listed Bidders.

iv. The L1 Bidder will be selected on the basis of net total of the price

evaluation as quoted in the Reverse Auction

v. The successful Bidder is required to provide price confirmation and price breakup strictly on the lines of Annexure-F within 48 hours of conclusion of the Reverse Auction, failing which Bank may take appropriate action.

vi. Errors, if any, in the price breakup format will be rectified as under:

(a) If there is a discrepancy between the unit price and total price which

is obtained by multiplying the unit price with quantity, the unit price

shall prevail and the total price shall be corrected unless it is a lower

figure. If the Bidder does not accept the correction of errors, the Bid

will be rejected.

(b) If there is a discrepancy in the unit price quoted in figures and words,

the unit price in figures or in words, as the case may be, which

corresponds to the total Bid price for the Bid shall be taken as correct.



(c) If the vendor has not worked out the total Bid price or the total Bid

price does not correspond to the unit price quoted either in words or

figures, the unit price quoted in words shall be taken as correct.

(d) The Bidder should quote for all the items/services desired in this RFP.

In case, prices are not quoted by any Bidder for any specific product

and / or service, for the purpose of evaluation, the highest of the

prices quoted by other Bidders participating in the bidding process will

be reckoned as the notional price for that service, for that Bidder.

However, if selected, at the time of award of Contract, the lowest of

the price(s) quoted by other Bidders (whose Price Bids are also

opened) for that service will be reckoned. This shall be binding on all

the Bidders. However, the Bank reserves the right to reject all such

incomplete Bids.

18. Contacting the Bank:

i. No Bidder shall contact the Bank on any matter relating to its Bid, from the time of opening of Price Bid to the time, the Contract is awarded.

ii. Any effort by a Bidder to influence the Bank in its decisions on Bid evaluation, Bid comparison or contract award may result in the rejection of the Bidder’s Bid.

19. Award Criteria:

i. Bank will notify successful Bidder (L1) in writing by letter or fax/email that

its Bid has been accepted. The Selected Bidder has to return the duplicate

copy of the same to the Bank within 7 working days, duly Accepted,

Stamped and Signed by Authorized Signatory in token of acceptance.

ii. The successful Bidder will have to submit Non-disclosure Agreement

(wherever applicable), Performance Bank Guarantee for the amount and validity as desired in part II and strictly on the lines of format given at Annexure-K of this document together with acceptance of all terms and conditions of RFP.

iii. Copy of board resolution or power of attorney showing that the signatory

has been duly authorized to sign the acceptance letter, contract and NDA should be submitted.

iv. The notification of award will constitute the formation of the Contract.

v. The successful Bidder shall be required to enter into a contract/ SLA with

the Bank, within 30 days of award of the tender or within such extended period as may be decided by the Bank.



vi. Until the execution of a formal contract, the Bid document, together with

the Bank’s notification of award and the vendor’s acceptance thereof, would constitute a binding contract between the Bank and the successful Bidder.

vii. The contract/ agreement will be based on Bidder’s offer document with all

its enclosures, modifications arising out of negotiation /clarifications etc and will include SLA, project plan – phases & milestones and schedule, copies of all necessary documents, licenses, certifications etc

viii. The Bank reserves the right to stipulate, at the time of finalization of the

contract, any other document(s) to be enclosed as a part of the final contract.

ix. Failure of the successful Bidder to comply with the requirements/terms and conditions of this RFP shall constitute sufficient grounds for the annulment of the award and forfeiture of the EMD and/or PBG.

x. Upon notification of award to the L1 Bidder, the Bank will promptly notify the award of contract to the successful Bidder on the Bank’s website. The EMD of each unsuccessful Bidder will be discharged and returned.

20. Powers to Vary or Omit Work:

i. No alterations, amendments, omissions, additions, suspensions or

variations of the work (hereinafter referred to as variation) under the

contract shall be made by the successful Bidder except as directed in

writing by Bank. The Bank shall have full powers, subject to the provision

herein after contained, from time to time during the execution of the

contract, by notice in writing to instruct the successful Bidder to make any

variation without prejudice to the contract. The finally selected Bidder shall

carry out such variation and be bound by the same conditions as far as

applicable as though the said variations occurred in the contract

documents. If any, suggested variations would, in the opinion of the finally

selected Bidder, if carried out, prevent him from fulfilling any of his

obligations under the contract, he shall notify Bank thereof in writing with

reasons for holding such opinion and Bank shall instruct the successful

Bidder to make such other modified variation without prejudice to the

contract. The finally selected Bidder shall carry out such variation and be

bound by the same conditions as far as applicable as though the said

variations occurred in the contract documents. If the Bank confirms its

instructions, the successful Bidder’s obligations shall be modified to such

an extent as may be mutually agreed, if such variation is substantial and

involves considerable extra cost. Any agreed difference in cost



occasioned by such variation shall be added to or deducted from the

contract price as the case may be.

ii. In any case in which the successful Bidder has received instructions from

the Bank as to the requirements for carrying out the altered or additional

substituted work which either then or later on, will in the opinion of the

finally selected Bidders, involve a claim for additional payments, such

additional payments shall be mutually agreed in line with the terms and

conditions of the order.

iii. If any change in the work is likely to result in reduction in cost, the parties

shall agree in writing so as to the extent of change in contract price,

before the finally selected Bidder(s) proceeds with the change. In all the

above cases, in the event of a disagreement as to the reasonableness of

the said sum, the decision of the Bank shall prevail.

21. No Waiver of Bank Rights or Successful Bidder’s Liability:

Neither any sign-off, nor any payment by the Bank for acceptance of the

whole or any part of the work, nor any extension of time, nor any possession

taken by the Bank shall affect or prejudice the rights of Bank against the

finally selected Bidder(s), or relieve the finally selected Bidder(s) of his

obligations for the due performance of the contract, or be interpreted as

approval of the work done, or create liability in the Bank to pay for

alterations/ amendments/ variations, or discharge the liability of the

successful Bidder(s) for the payment of damages whether due, ascertained,

or certified or not or any sum against the payment of which he is bound to

indemnify the Bank nor shall any such certificate nor the acceptance by him

of any such amount paid on account or otherwise affect or prejudice the

rights of the successful Bidder against Bank.

22. Contract Amendments:

No variation in or modification of the terms of the Contract shall be

made, except by written amendment, signed by the parties.

23. Bank’s Right to Accept Any Bid and to Reject Any or All Bids:

The Bank reserves the right to accept or reject any Bid in part or in full or to

cancel the bidding process and reject all Bids at any time prior to contract

award, without incurring any liability to the affected Bidder or Bidders or

any obligation to inform the affected Bidder or Bidders of the grounds for

the Bank’s action.

24. Documentary Evidence Establishing Bidder’s Eligibility and Qualifications:



On acceptance of the Bid by the Bank, the Bidder needs to submit the undertaking of authenticity on the lines of Annexure-M along with documentary evidence of their eligibility/qualifications to perform the Contract to the Bank’s satisfaction:

i. that in case of a Bidder offering to supply products and/or services

mentioned in the scope of work, the Bidders need to provide the

evidence that Bidder has been duly authorized by the OEM strictly

on the lines of authorization letter Annexure-N.

ii. that adequate, specialized expertise are available with the Bidder to

ensure that the services are responsive and the Bidder will assume

total responsibility for the fault-free operation of the product

proposed and maintenance thereof during the support

(warranty/annual maintenance contract, if desired) period.

25. Performance Bank Guarantee:

i. Performance Bank Guarantee [PBG] of the amount with validity

period specified in Part II of this RFP strictly on the format at

Annexure-H is to be submitted by the finally selected Bidder. The

PBG has to be issued by a Scheduled Commercial Bank other than

SBI and needs to be submitted within the specified time of receipt of

formal communication from the Bank about their Bid finally selected.

Purchase Order will be released only after receipt of the Performance

Bank Guarantee. In case, SBI is the sole Banker for the Bidder, a

Letter of Comfort from SBI may be accepted.

ii. The PBG is required to protect the interest of the Bank against the

risk of non-performance of the successful Bidder in respect of

successful implementation of the project which may warrant invoking

of PBG, also if any act of the supplier results in imposition of

Liquidated Damages then also the Bank reserves the right to invoke

the PBG.

26. Country of Origin / Eligibility of Goods & Services:

i. All equipment and components thereof to be supplied under the

Contract shall have their origin in eligible source countries, as per the

prevailing Import Trade Control Regulations in India.

ii. For purposes of this clause, “origin” means the place where the goods

are mined, grown, or manufactured or produced, or the place from

which the related product is supplied. Goods are produced when,

through manufacturing, processing or substantial and major assembly



of components, a commercially-recognized product results that is

substantially different in basic characteristics or in purpose or utility

from its components.

27. Delivery, Installation, Commissioning & Documentation:

i. The Vendor shall provide such packing of the products as is required

to prevent its damage or deterioration during transit thereof to the

location given by the Bank. The packing shall be sufficient to

withstand, without limitation, rough handling during transit and

exposure to extreme temperature, salt and precipitation during transit

and open storage. Size and weight of packing cases shall take into

consideration, where appropriate, the remoteness of the Products final

destination and the absence of heavy handling facilities at all transit

points.

ii. Delivery, installation and commissioning of the equipment shall be

made by the Vendor in accordance with the system approved / ordered

and within the time schedule given in the Scope of work given in

Annexure-E of this document.

iii. The delivery will be deemed complete when the equipment/

components/ associated software/firmware are received in good

working condition at the designated locations, mentioned in part II of

this RFP.

iv. The installation will be deemed to be completed, when the product

including all the equipment, hardware, accessories/components,

firmware/system software, and other associated software have been

supplied, installed and operationalised as per the technical

specifications and all the features as per the technical specifications

are demonstrated and implemented as required, on the systems, to the

satisfaction of the Bank. The Bidder has to resolve any problem faced

during installation and operationalisation.

v. In addition, vendor will supply all associated documentation relating to

the equipment/products/hardware, system software/firmware, etc. The

product(s) are considered accepted (commissioned and

operationalised) after signing the Acceptance Test Plan (ATP)

document jointly by the representative of the Bank and the engineer

from the vendor on the lines of format/certificate on the lines of

Annexure-I of this RFP. The component level checking for individual

item may be included during the acceptance test. The ‘Acceptance

Test Plan’ document shall be deemed to form a part of the Agreement,



to be signed between the vendor and the SBI. On the evaluation of the

Acceptance Test results, if required, in view of the performance of the

products/services (including hardware equipment/ components/

software), as observed during the Acceptance Test, the Bidder shall

take remedial measures including upgradation of any of the

components thereunder, including replacement thereof, at no

additional cost to the Bank within a fortnight from the date of

notification of the same to the vendor. The vendor should ensure that

the product meets the requirements of the Bank as envisaged in the

RFP.

vi. The details of the documents to be furnished by the Vendor are

specified hereunder:-

(a) 2 copies of Vendor’s Invoice showing contract number, products description, quantity, unit price and total amount.

(b) Delivery Note or acknowledgement of receipt of products from the Consignee or in case of products from abroad, original and two copies of the negotiable clean Airway Bill.

(c) 2 copies of packing list identifying contents of each of the package.

(d) Manufacturer’s / Vendor’s warranty certificate.

vii. The above documents shall be received by the Bank before arrival of

products (except where it is handed over to the Consignee with all documents). If these documents are not received, the Vendor will be responsible for any consequent expenses.

viii. Penalties as specified in Annexure-J will be applicable for the any

kind of default in delay in delivery, installation/commissioning/support etc. expected in scope of work which will be deducted at the time of making payment(s).

ix. In addition to the penalty on delayed supplies, Bank also reserves the

right to cancel the Purchase Order and forfeit the EMD. In the event of such cancellation, the vendor is not entitled to any compensation, whatsoever.

x. For the System & other Software/firmware required with the hardware

ordered for, the following will apply:-

(a) The vendor shall supply standard software/firmware package published by third parties in or out of India in their original publisher-packed status only, and should have procured the same either directly from the publishers or from the publisher's sole authorized representatives only.



(b) The Vendor shall provide complete and legal documentation of all sub systems, licensed operating systems, licensed system software/firmware, licensed utility software and other licensed software. The Vendor shall also provide licensed software for all software/firmware whether developed by them or acquired from others.

(c) In case the Vendor is providing software/firmware which is not its proprietary software then the Vendor must submit evidence in the form of agreement he has entered into with the software/firmware vendor which includes support from the software/firmware vendor for the proposed software for the entire l period required by the Bank.

(d) The ownership of the software license shall be that of the Bank from the date of delivery of the same. In other words, wherever the ownership of the licenses is indicated, the name “State Bank of India” must appear to indicate that the Bank is the perpetual owner of the software/license. Evidence to this effect must be submitted before the payment can be released.

28. System Integration Testing & User Acceptance Testing

The Vendor should integrate the solution with the existing systems as per requirement of the Bank and carry out thorough system integration testing.

System integration testing will be followed by user acceptance testing, plan for which has to be submitted by the Vendor to the Bank. The UAT includes functional tests, resilience tests and operational tests etc. SBI staff / third Party Vendor designated by the Bank(FMS Team) will carry out the functional testing. This staff / third party vendor will need necessary on-site training for the purpose and should be provided by the Vendor. Vendor should carry out other testing like resiliency and operational test etc. Vendor should submit result log for all testing to the Bank.

On satisfactory completion of the aforementioned tests, the User Acceptance Test (UAT) letter will be issued to the vendor by SBI / FMS team on the line of Annexure-I.

29. Services:

i. All professional services necessary to successfully implement the proposed Solution will be part of the RFP/contract. These services include, but are not limited to, Training, Deployment methodologies etc

ii. The Bidder should also submit as part of technical Bid an overview of

Project Management/solution deployment approach of the proposed product.



iii. Bidder should ensure that vendor’s key personnel with relevant skill-

sets are available to the Bank.

iv. Bidder should ensure that the quality of methodologies for delivering the services, adhere to quality standards/timelines stipulated therefor.

v. Bidder shall be willing to transfer skills to relevant personnel from the

Bank / FMS team contracted by the Bank, by means of training and documentation.

vi. Bidder shall provide and implement patches/ upgrades/ updates for

hardware/ software/ Operating System / Middleware etc as and when released by the Vendor/ OEM or as per requirements of the Bank. Bidder should bring to notice of the Bank all releases/ version changes.

vii. Bidder shall obtain a written permission from the Bank before applying

any of the patches/ upgrades/ updates. Bidder has to support older versions of the hardware/ software/ Operating System /Middleware etc in case the Bank chooses not to upgrade to latest version.

viii. Bidder shall provide maintenance support for Hardware/ Software/

Operating System/ Middleware over the entire period of contract. ix. All product updates, upgrades & patches shall be provided by the

Bidder/ Vendor free of cost during warranty and AMC/ ATS/ S&S period.

x. Bidder shall provide legally valid Software Solution. The detailed

information on license count and type of license shall also be provided

to the Bank.

xi. Bidder support staff should be well trained to effectively handle queries

raised by the employees of the Bank

xii. The Bidder shall keep the Bank explicitly informed the end of support /

life dates on related equipment/products/hardware/firmware and should

ensure support during warranty and AMC/ATS/S&S.

30. Warranty and Annual Maintenance Contract:

i. The selected Bidder shall support the Solution during the period of

warranty and AMC (if included in purchase order) as specified in Scope of

work in this RFP from the date of acceptance of the Solution by State

Bank of India.



ii. During the warranty and AMC period (if desired), the Bidder will have to

undertake comprehensive support of the Solution/Equipment supplied by

the Bidder and all new versions, releases, and updates for all standard

software to be supplied to the Bank at no additional cost . During the

support period, the Bidder shall maintain the Solution to comply with

parameters defined for acceptance criteria and the Bidder shall be

responsible for all costs relating to labour, spares, maintenance

(preventive and corrective), compliance of security requirements and

transport charges from and to the Site (s) in connection with the repair/

replacement of the Equipment, Software Solution, which, under normal

and proper use and maintenance thereof, proves defective in design,

material or workmanship or fails to conform to the specifications, as

specified.

iii. During the support period (warranty and AMC, if desired), the vendor shall

ensure that services of professionally qualified personnel are available for

providing comprehensive on-site maintenance of the Solution and its

components as per the Bank’s requirements. Comprehensive

maintenance shall include maintenance/replacement of the equipment,

reloading of firmware/software, compliance to security requirements etc.

when required or in the event of system crash/malfunctioning, arranging

and configuring facility as per the requirements of the Bank. The Bidder

shall provide services of an expert engineer at SBI GITC, Belapur

whenever required. In case of failure of Solution, the Bidder shall ensure

that Solution is made operational to the full satisfaction of the Bank within

the given timelines.

iv. Warranty/ AMC (if opted) for the system software/ off-the shelf software

will be provided to the Bank as per the general conditions of sale of such

software.

v. Support (Warranty/ AMC, if opted) would be on-site and comprehensive in

nature and must have back to back support from the OEM/Vendor. The

vendor will warrant products against defects arising out of faulty design

etc. during the specified support period.

vi. In the event of system break down or failures at any stage, protection

available, which would include the following, shall be specified.

a. Diagnostics for identification of system failures

b. Protection of data/ Configuration

c. Recovery/ restart facility

d. Backup of system software/ Configuration



vii. Prompt support shall be made available as desired in this RFP during the support period at the locations as and when required by the Bank.

viii. Bidder support staff should be well trained to effectively handle queries

raised by the employees of the Bank.

ix. Updated escalation matrix shall be made available to the Bank once in

each quarter and each time the matrix gets changed.

31. Compliance with IS Security Policy:

The Vendor shall have to comply with Bank’s IT & IS Security policy in key concern areas relevant to the RFP, details of which will be shared with the finally selected Bidder. Some of the key areas are as under:

i. Responsibilities for data and application privacy and confidentiality

ii. Responsibilities on system and software access control and

administration

iii. Incident response and reporting procedures

iv. Data Encryption/Protection requirements of the Bank.

v. In general, confidentiality, integrity and availability must be

ensured.

vi. Solution implementation architecture.

32. Penalties: As mentioned in Annexure-J of this RFP.

33. Right to Verification:

The Bank reserves the right to verify any or all of the statements made by

the Bidder in the tender document and to inspect the Bidder’s facility, if

necessary, to establish to its satisfaction about the Bidder’s

capacity/capabilities to perform the job.

34. Purchase Price:

i. Total cost of Solution with support (warranty and AMC, if desired) would

be the Total Cost of Ownership (TCO) and has to be quoted in

commercial Bid.

ii. Bidders should ensure that exchange rate fluctuations, changes in import

duty/other taxes should not affect the rupee value of commercial Bid over

the validity period defined in this RFP.

iii. The order will be placed for total Cost of Solution/services/warranty and

AMC/ATS/S&S. Bank may also issue a separate order for AMC after

expiry of the warranty period.



iv. The applicable TDS will be deducted at the time of payment of invoices.

v. Terms of payment are given in Part-II of this RFP document.

vi. Prices payable to the Vendor as stated in the Contract shall be firm and

not subject to adjustment during performance of the Contract, irrespective

of reasons whatsoever, including exchange rate fluctuations, any upward

revision in duties, charges, etc.

vii. The Bidder will pass on to the Bank, all fiscal benefits arising out of

reductions, if any, in Government levies viz. sales tax, excise duty, custom

duty, etc. or the benefit of discounts if any announced in respect of the

cost of the items for which orders have been placed during that period.

35 Inspection and Quality Control Tests

i. The Bank reserves the right to carry out pre-shipment factory / godown

inspection by a team of Bank officials or demand a demonstration of the

product on a representative model at Bidder’s place.

ii. The Inspection and Quality Control tests before evaluation, prior to

shipment of goods and at the time of final acceptance would be as follows:

a) In the event of the Software Solution failing to pass the acceptance test,

as per the specifications given, a period not exceeding two weeks will

be given to rectify the defects and clear the acceptance test, failing

which, the Bank reserves the right to cancel the Purchase Order.

b) The inspection and quality control tests may also be conducted at the

point of delivery and / or at the goods’ final destination. Reasonable

facilities and assistance, including access to drawings and production

data, shall be furnished to the inspectors, at no charge to the Bank. In

case of failure by the Vendor to provide necessary facility / equipment at

its premises, all the cost of such inspection like travel, boarding, lodging

& other incidental expenses of the Bank’s representatives to be borne

by the Vendor.

c) Nothing stated herein above shall in any way release the Vendor from

any warranty or other obligations under this contract.

iii. The Bank’s right to inspect, test the product/ solution after delivery of the

same to the Bank and where necessary reject the products/solution which

does not meet the specification provided by the Bank. This shall in no

way be limited or waived by reason of the products/ solution having



previously being inspected, tested and passed by the Bank or its

representative prior to the products/ solution shipment from the place of

origin by the Bank or its representative prior to the installation and

commissioning.

Iv. Nothing stated hereinabove shall in any way release the Vendor from any

warranty or other obligations under this contract.

v. System integration testing and User Acceptance testing will be carried out

as per requirement of the Bank.

36. Right to Audit:

i. The Selected Bidder (Service Provider) has to get itself annually audited

by internal/ external empanelled Auditors appointed by the Bank/

inspecting official from the Reserve Bank of India or any regulatory

authority, covering the risk parameters finalized by the Bank/ such

auditors in the areas of products (IT hardware/ software, equipment) and

services etc. provided to the Bank and the Service Provider is required to

submit such certification by such Auditors to the Bank. The Service

Provider and or his / their outsourced agents / sub – contractors (if

allowed by the Bank) shall facilitate the same The Bank can make its

expert assessment on the efficiency and effectiveness of the security,

control, risk management, governance system and process created by the

Service Provider. The Service Provider shall, whenever required by the

Auditors, furnish all relevant information, records/data to them. All costs

for such audit shall be borne by the Bank.

ii. Where any deficiency has been observed during audit of the Service

Provider on the risk parameters finalized by the Bank or in the

certification submitted by the Auditors, the Service Provider shall

correct/resolve the same at the earliest and shall provide all necessary

documents related to resolution thereof and the auditor shall further

certify in respect of resolution of the deficiencies. The resolution provided

by the Service Provider shall require to be certified by the Auditors

covering the respective risk parameters against which such deficiencies

have been observed.

iii. Service Provider shall, whenever required by the Bank, furnish all relevant

information, records/data to such auditors and/or inspecting officials of

the Bank/Reserve Bank of India and or any regulatory authority. The

Bank reserves the right to call and/or retain for any relevant material

information /reports including audit or review reports undertaken by the



service provider (e.g., financial, internal control and security reviews) and

findings made on Selected Bidder in conjunction with the services

provided to the Bank.

37. Subcontracting:

i. As per scope of the RFP, subcontracting is prohibited. However, if the

Bidder subsequently wishes to sub-contract the scope of work, it will have

to obtain specific written permission from the Bank before contracting any

work to subcontractors. Bank at its own discretion may permit or deny the

same.

ii. In case subcontracting is permitted by the Bank, the contracting vendor

will be responsible for all the services provided to the Bank regardless of

which entity is conducting the operations. The contracting vendor is also

responsible for ensuring that the sub-contractor comply with all security

requirements of the contract and the Bank can obtain independent audit

report for the same. In such a case, the Bidder shall provide

subcontracting details to the Bank and if require, Bank may evaluate the

same.

38. Validity of Agreement:

The Agreement/ SLA will be valid for the period up to end of support

period including AMC, if opted. The Bank reserves the right to terminate

the Agreement as per the terms of RFP.

39. Limitation of liability:

i. For breach of any obligation mentioned in this RFP, subject to obligations

mentioned in this clause, in no event Service Provider shall be liable for

damages to the Bank arising under or in connection with this agreement

for an amount exceeding the total Cost of the Project. Service provider will

ensure Bank’s data confidentiality and shall be responsible for liability

arising in case of breach of any kind of security and/or leakage of

confidential customer/Bank’s related information to the extent of loss so

caused.

ii. The limitations set forth herein shall not apply with respect to:

a) claims that are the subject of indemnification pursuant to IPR

infringement, b) damage(s) occasioned by the gross negligence, fraud or

willful misconduct of Service Provider, c) damage(s) occasioned by Service Provider for breach of

Confidentiality Obligations,



d) When a dispute is settled by the Court of Law in India. e) Regulatory or statutory fines imposed by a Government or

Regulatory agency for non-compliance of statutory or regulatory guidelines applicable to the Bank, provided such guidelines were brought to the notice of Service Provider.

40. Confidentiality:

i. Bidder acknowledges and agrees that all tangible and intangible

information obtained, developed or disclosed including all documents,

contract, purchase order to be issued, data papers and statements and

trade secret of the Bank relating to its business practices and their

competitive position in the market place provided to the selected Bidder by

the Bank in connection with the performance of obligations of Bidder

under the purchase order to be issued, in part or complete shall be

considered to be confidential and proprietary information (“Confidential

Information”) and shall not be disclosed to any third party/published

without the written approval of the Bank.

ii. The Confidential Information will be safeguarded and Bidder will take all

the necessary action to protect it against misuse, loss, destruction,

alterations or deletions thereof. In the event of a breach or threatened

breach by Bidder of this section, monetary damages may not be an

adequate remedy; therefore, Bank shall be entitled to injunctive relief to

restrain Bidder from any such breach, threatened or actual.

iii. Any document, other than the Contract itself, shall remain the property of

the Bank and shall be returned (in all copies) to the Bank on completion of

the Vendor’s performance under the Contract, if so required by the Bank.

41. Delay in the Vendor’s Performance:

i. Delivery, installation, commissioning of the Solution and performance of

Services shall be made by the Vendor within the timelines prescribed in

part II of this document.

ii. If at any time during performance of the Contract, the Vendor should

encounter conditions impeding timely delivery of the Solution and

performance of Services, the Vendor shall promptly notify the Bank in

writing of the fact of the delay, it’s likely duration and cause(s). As soon

as practicable after receipt of the Vendor’s notice, the Bank shall evaluate

the situation and may, at its discretion, extend the Vendors’ time for

performance, in which case, the extension shall be ratified by the parties

by amendment of the Contract.



iii. Any delay in performing the obligation/ defect in performance by the

Vendor may result in imposition of penalty, liquidated damages, invocation

of Performance Bank Guarantee and/or termination of contract (as laid

down elsewhere in this RFP document)

42. Vendor’s obligations:

i. The Vendor is responsible for and obliged to conduct all contracted

activities in accordance with the contract using state-of-the-art methods

and economic principles and exercising all means available to achieve the

performance specified in the Contract.

ii. The Vendor is obliged to work closely with the Bank’s staff, act within its

own authority and abide by directives issued by the Bank from time to time

and complete implementation activities.

iii. The Vendor will abide by the job safety measures prevalent in India and

will free the Bank from all demands or responsibilities arising from

accidents or loss of life, the cause of which is the Vendor’s negligence.

The Vendor will pay all indemnities arising from such incidents and will not

hold the Bank responsible or obligated.

iv. The Vendor is responsible for managing the activities of its personnel or

sub-contracted personnel (where permitted) and will hold itself responsible

for any misdemeanors.

v. Vendor shall provide necessary training from the OEM to the designated

SBI officials on the configuration, operation/ functionalities, maintenance,

support & administration for Solution, installation, troubleshooting

processes of the proposed solution.

vi. The Vendor shall treat as confidential all data and information about SBI,

obtained in the process of executing its responsibilities, in strict

confidence and will not reveal such information to any other party without

prior written approval of the Bank as explained under ‘Non-Disclosure

Agreement’ in Annexure-K of this document.

43. Technical Documentation:

i. The Vendor shall deliver the following documents to the Bank for every

Equipment / software including third party software before software/

service become operational, which includes, user manuals, installation

manuals, operation manuals, design documents, process documents,



technical manuals, functional specification, software requirement

specification, on-line tutorials/ CBTs, system configuration documents,

system/database administrative documents, debugging/diagnostics

documents, test procedures etc.

ii. The vendor shall also provide documents related to Review Records/ Test

Bug Reports/ Root Cause Analysis Report, list of all Product components,

list of all dependent/external modules and list of all documents relating to

traceability of the Solution as and when applicable.

iii. The Vendor shall also provide the MIS reports as per requirements of the

Bank. Any level/ version changes and/or clarification or corrections or

modifications in the above mentioned documentation should be supplied

by the Vendor to the Bank, free of cost in timely manner.

44. Patent Rights/Intellectual Property Rights:

i. For any licensed software used by the finally selected L1 Vendor for

performing services or developing software for the Bank, the Vendor shall

have the right as well as the right to license for the outsourced services or

third party software development. Any license or IPR violation on the part

of Vendor/ Subcontractor should not put the Bank at risk. The Bank

reserves the right to audit the license usage of the Vendor.

ii. The Vendor shall, at its own expenses without any limitation, defend and

indemnify the Bank against all third party claims or infringements of

Intellectual Property Rights including patent, trademark, copyright, trade

secret or industrial design rights arising from use of the products or any

part thereof in India or abroad. In case of violation/ infringement of patent/

trademark/ copyright/ trade secrete or industrial design, the supplier shall

after due inspection and testing get the solution redesigned for the Bank,

at no extra cost.

iii. The Vendor shall expeditiously extinguish any such claims and shall have

full rights to defend itself there from. If the Bank is required to pay

compensation to a third party resulting from such infringement(s), the

Vendor shall be fully responsible therefore, including all expenses and

court and legal fees.

iv. The Bank will give notice to the Vendor of any such claim without delay,

provide reasonable assistance to the Vendor in disposing of the claim,

and shall at no time admit to any liability for or express any intent to settle

the claim.



v. The Vendor shall grant the Bank a fully paid-up, irrevocable, non-

exclusive, unlimited, perpetual license throughout the territory of India or

abroad to access, replicate and use software provided by the Vendor,

including all inventions, designs and marks embodied therein perpetually.

The source code / object code / executable code and compilation

procedures of the Software Solution should be placed under an Escrow

arrangement. All necessary documentation in this behalf should be made

available to the Bank. In case of Escrow arrangement, complete details

and the location and the terms and conditions applicable for escrow must

be specified. Any update or upgrade to source code should be informed

and brought under Escrow or made available to the Bank.

45. Liquidated Damages:

If the Vendor fails to deliver any or all of the products/ solution or perform

the services within the stipulated time schedule as specified in this RFP/

Contract, the Bank may, without prejudice to its other remedies under the

Contract, and unless otherwise extension of time is agreed upon without

the application of Liquidated Damages, deduct from the Contract Price, as

liquidated damages mentioned in part II (Schedule of Events, Sl No 19).

Once the maximum deduction is reached, the Bank may consider

termination of the Contract.

46. Conflict of Interest:

Bidder shall not have a conflict of interest (the “Conflict of Interest”) that

affects the bidding Process. Any Bidder found to have a Conflict of

Interest shall be disqualified. In the event of disqualification, the Bank shall

be entitled to forfeit and appropriate the Bid Security and/or Performance

Security (Performance Bank Guarantee), as the case may be, as

mutually agreed upon genuine estimated loss and damage likely to be

suffered and incurred by the Bank and not by way of penalty for, inter alia,

the time, cost and effort of the Bank, including consideration of such

Bidder’s proposal (the “Damages”), without prejudice to any other right or

remedy that may be available to the Bank under the bidding Documents

and/ or the Concession Agreement or otherwise. Without limiting the

generality of the above, a Bidder shall be deemed to have a Conflict of

Interest affecting the bidding Process, if:

(a) the Bidder, its Member or Associate (or any constituent thereof) and any

other Bidder, its Member or any Associate thereof (or any constituent

thereof) have common controlling shareholders or other ownership

interest; provided that this disqualification shall not apply in cases where

the direct or indirect shareholding of a Bidder, its Member or an



Associate thereof (or any shareholder thereof having a shareholding of

more than 5% (five per cent) of the paid up and subscribed share capital

of such Bidder, Member or Associate, as the case may be) in the other

Bidder, its Member or Associate, has less than 5% (five per cent) of the

subscribed and paid up equity share capital thereof; provided further that

this disqualification shall not apply to any ownership by a bank, insurance

company, pension fund or a public financial institution referred to in

section 4A of the Companies Act, 1956. For the purposes of this Clause,

indirect shareholding held through one or more intermediate persons

shall be computed as follows:

(i) where any intermediary is controlled by a person through management

control or otherwise, the entire shareholding held by such controlled

intermediary in any other person (the “Subject Person”) shall be taken

into account for computing the shareholding of such controlling person

in the Subject Person; and

(ii) subject always to sub-clause (i) above, where a person does not

exercise control over an intermediary, which has shareholding in the

Subject Person, the computation of indirect shareholding of such

person in the Subject Person shall be undertaken on a proportionate

basis; provided, however, that no such shareholding shall be reckoned

under this sub-clause if the shareholding of such person in the

intermediary is less than 26% of the subscribed and paid up equity

shareholding of such intermediary; or

(b) a constituent of such Bidder is also a constituent of another Bidder; or

(c) such Bidder, its Member or any Associate thereof receives or has

received any direct or indirect subsidy, grant, concessional loan or

subordinated debt from any other Bidder, its Member or Associate, or has

provided any such subsidy, grant, concessional loan or subordinated debt

to any other Bidder, its Member or any Associate thereof; or

(d) such Bidder has the same legal representative for purposes of this Bid as

any other Bidder; or

(e) such Bidder, or any Associate thereof, has a relationship with another

Bidder, or any Associate thereof, directly or through common third party/

parties, that puts either or both of them in a position to have access to

each other’s information about, or to influence the Bid of either or each

other; or

(f) such Bidder or any of its affiliates thereof has participated as a consultant

to the Bank in the preparation of any documents, design or technical

specifications of the Project.



47. Fraud & Corrupt Practices:

i. The Bidder and their respective officers, employees, agents and

advisers shall observe the highest standard of ethics during the bidding

Process. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein, the

Bank shall reject an Application without being liable in any manner

whatsoever to the Bidder if it determines that the Bidder has, directly or

indirectly or through an agent, engaged in

corrupt/fraudulent/coercive/undesirable or restrictive practices in the

bidding Process.

ii. Without prejudice to the rights of the Bank under Clause 44(i)

hereinabove, if a Bidder is found by the Bank to have directly or

indirectly or through an agent, engaged or indulged in any

corrupt/fraudulent/coercive/undesirable or restrictive practices during

the bidding Process, such Bidder shall not be eligible to participate in

any EOI/RFP issued by the Bank during a period of 2 (two) years from

the date if such Bidder is found by the Bank to have directly or indirectly

or through an agent, engaged or indulged in any corrupt/ fraudulent/

coercive/ undesirable or restrictive practices, as the case may be.

iii. For the purposes of this Clause , the following terms shall have the

meaning hereinafter, respectively assigned to them:

(a) “corrupt practice” means (i) the offering, giving, receiving, or

soliciting, directly or indirectly, of anything of value to influence the

actions of any person connected with the bidding Process (for

avoidance of doubt, offering of employment to or employing or

engaging in any manner whatsoever, directly or indirectly, any official

of the Bank who is or has been associated in any manner, directly or

indirectly with the bidding Process or the Letter of Authority or has

dealt with matters concerning the Concession Agreement or arising

there from, before or after the execution thereof, at any time prior to

the expiry of one year from the date such official resigns or retires

from or otherwise ceases to be in the service of the Bank, shall be

deemed to constitute influencing the actions of a person connected

with the bidding Process); or (ii) engaging in any manner whatsoever,

whether during the bidding Process or after the issue of the Letter of

Authority or after the execution of the Agreement, as the case may

be, any person in respect of any matter relating to the Project or the

Letter of Authority or the Agreement, who at any time has been or is

a legal, financial or technical adviser of the Bank in relation to any

matter concerning the Project;



(b) “Fraudulent practice” means a misrepresentation or omission of

facts or suppression of facts or disclosure of incomplete facts, in

order to influence the bidding Process

(c) “Coercive practice” means impairing or harming or threatening to

impair or harm, directly or indirectly, any person or property to

influence any person’s participation or action in the bidding Process;

(d) “Undesirable practice” means (i) establishing contact with any

person connected with or employed or engaged by the Bank with the

objective of canvassing, lobbying or in any manner influencing or

attempting to influence the bidding Process; or (ii) having a Conflict

of Interest; and

(e) “Restrictive practice” means forming a cartel or arriving at any

understanding or arrangement among Bidders with the objective of

restricting or manipulating a full and fair competition in the bidding

Process.

48. Termination for Default:

i. The Bank, without prejudice to any other remedy for breach of Contract,

by a written notice of not less than 30 (thirty) days sent to the Vendor,

may terminate the Contract in whole or in part:

a. If the Vendor fails to deliver any or all of the Solution and Services

within the period(s) specified in the Contract, or within any extension

thereof granted by the Bank; or

b. If the vendor fails to perform any other obligation(s) under the contract;

or

c. Laxity in adherence to standards laid down by the Bank; or

d. Discrepancies/deviations in the agreed processes and/or Solution; or

e. Violations of terms and conditions stipulated in this RFP.

ii. In the event the Bank terminates the Contract in whole or in part for the

breaches attributable to the Vendor, the Bank may procure, upon such

terms and in such manner as it deems appropriate, Solution and Services

similar to those undelivered, and the Vendor shall be liable to the Bank for

any increase in cost for such similar Solution and/or Services. However,

the Vendor shall continue performance of the Contract to the extent not

terminated.



iii. If the contract is terminated under any termination clause, the vendor shall

handover all documents/ executable/ Bank’s data or any other relevant

information to the Bank in timely manner and in proper format as per

scope of this RFP and shall also support the orderly transition to another

vendor or to the Bank.

iv. During the transition, the Vendor shall also support the Bank on technical

queries/support on process implementation or in case of software provision

for future upgrades.

v. The Bank’s right to terminate the Contract will be in addition to the

penalties / liquidated damages and other actions as deemed fit.

vi. In the event of failure of the Service Provider to render the Services or in

the event of termination of agreement or expiry of term or otherwise, without

prejudice to any other right, the Bank at its sole discretion may make

alternate arrangement for getting the Services contracted with another

vendor. In such case, the Bank shall give prior notice to the existing Service

Provider. The existing Service Provider shall continue to provide services as

per the terms of contract until a ‘New Service Provider’ completely takes

over the work. During the transition phase, the existing Service Provider

shall render all reasonable assistance to the new Service Provider within

such period prescribed by the Bank, at no extra cost to the Bank, for

ensuring smooth switch over and continuity of services. If existing vendor is

breach of this obligation, they shall be liable for paying a penalty of as

provided in Part-II, (Schedule of Events, Sl No 20) on demand to the

Bank, which may be settled from the payment of invoices or Performance

Bank Guarantee for the contracted period or by invocation of Performance

Bank Guarantee.

49. Force Majeure:

i. Notwithstanding the provisions of terms and conditions contained in this

RFP, the Vendor shall not be liable for forfeiture of its performance

security, liquidated damages, or termination for default, if any, and to the

extent that the delay in performance or other failure to perform its

obligations under the Contract is the result of an event of Force Majeure.

ii. . For the purposes of this clause, 'Force Majeure' means and includes

wars, insurrections, revolution, civil disturbance, riots, terrorist acts, public

strikes, hartal, bundh, fires, floods, epidemic, quarantine restrictions, freight

embargoes, declared general strikes in relevant industries, Vis Major Act of

Government, impeding reasonable performance of the Vendor and / or

Sub-Contractor but does not include any foreseeable events, commercial



considerations or those involving fault or negligence on the part of the party

claiming Force Majeure.

iii. If a Force Majeure situation arises, the Vendor shall promptly notify the

Bank in writing of such condition and the cause thereof. Unless otherwise

directed by the Bank in writing, the Vendor shall continue to perform its

obligations under the Contract as far as is reasonably practical, and shall

seek all reasonable alternative means for performance not prevented by

the Force Majeure event.

50. Termination for Insolvency:

The Bank may, at any time, terminate the Contract by giving written notice

to the Vendor, if the Vendor becomes Bankrupt or insolvent or any

application for bankruptcy, insolvency or winding up has been filed against

it by any person. In this event, termination will be without compensation to

the Vendor, provided that such termination will not prejudice or affect any

right of action or remedy, which has accrued or will accrue thereafter to

the Bank.

51. Termination for Convenience:

The Bank, by written notice of not less than 90 (ninety) days sent to the

Vendor, may terminate the Contract, in whole or in part, at any time for its

convenience. The notice of termination shall specify that termination is for

the Bank’s convenience, the extent to which performance of the Vendor

under the Contract is terminated, and the date upon which such

termination becomes effective.

52. Disputes / Arbitration (applicable in case of successful Bidder only):

All disputes or differences whatsoever arising between the parties out of or in connection with this contract or in discharge of any obligation arising out of the Contract (whether during the progress of work or after completion of such work and whether before or after the termination of this contract, abandonment or breach of this contract), shall be settled amicably. If however, the parties are not able to solve them amicably, either party (SBI or Vendor), give written notice to other party clearly setting out there in specific dispute(s) and/or difference(s) and shall be referred to a sole arbitrator mutually agreed upon, and the award made in pursuance thereof shall be binding on the parties. In the absence of consensus about the single arbitrator, the dispute may be referred to joint arbitrator; one to be nominated by each party and the said arbitrators shall nominate a presiding arbitrator, before commencing the arbitration proceedings. The arbitration shall be settled in accordance with the



applicable Indian Laws. Any appeal will be subject to the exclusive jurisdiction of courts at Mumbai.

The Vendor shall continue work under the Contract during the arbitration proceedings unless otherwise directed by the Bank or unless the matter is such that the work cannot possibly be continued until the decision of the arbitrator is obtained. Arbitration proceeding shall be held at Mumbai, India, and the language of the arbitration proceedings and that of all documents and communications between the parties shall be in English.

53. Governing Language: The governing language shall be English.

54. Applicable Law:

The Contract shall be interpreted in accordance with the laws of the Union

of India and shall be subjected to the exclusive jurisdiction of courts at

Mumbai.

55. Taxes and Duties:

a. The Vendor shall be liable to pay all corporate taxes and income tax that

shall be levied according to the laws and regulations applicable from time

to time in India and the price Bid by the Vendor shall include all such taxes

in the contract price.

b. Prices quoted should be exclusive of all Central / State Government taxes/duties and levies but inclusive of Custom duty as also cost of incidental services such as transportation, road permits, insurance etc. The quoted prices and taxes/duties and statutory levies such as Service tax, VAT/ Sales tax, Excise duty, Custom duty, Octroi, etc. should be specified in the separate sheet (Annexure- F).

c. Custom duty as also cost of incidental services such as transportation, road permits, insurance etc. in connection with delivery of products at site including any incidental services and commissioning, if any, which may be levied, shall be borne by the Vendor and the Bank shall not be liable for the same. Only specified taxes/ levies and duties in the Annexure-F will be payable by the Bank on actuals upon production of original receipt wherever required. If any specified taxes/ levies and duties in Annexure-F are replaced by the new legislation of Government, same shall be borne by the Bank. The Bank shall not be liable for payment of those Central / State Government taxes, levies, duties or any tax/ duties imposed by local bodies/ authorities, which are not specified by the Bidder in Annexure-F



d. Prices payable to the Vendor as stated in the Contract shall be firm and not subject to adjustment during performance of the Contract, irrespective of reasons whatsoever, including exchange rate fluctuations, any upward revision in Custom duty. The Bidder will pass on to the Bank, all fiscal benefits arising out of reductions, if any, in Government levies viz. custom duty or the benefit of discounts if any announced in respect of the cost of the items for which orders have been placed during that period.

e. Income / Corporate Taxes in India: The Bidder shall be liable to pay all corporate taxes and income tax that shall be levied according to the laws and regulations applicable from time to time in India and the price Bid by the Bidder shall include all such taxes in the contract price.

f. All expenses, stamp duty and other charges/ expenses in connection with the execution of the Agreement as a result of this RFP process shall be borne by the Vendor.

56. Tax deduction at Source:

i. Wherever the laws and regulations require deduction of such taxes at the

source of payment, the Bank shall effect such deductions from the

payment due to the Vendor. The remittance of amounts so deducted and

issuance of certificate for such deductions shall be made by the Bank as

per the laws and regulations for the time being in force. Nothing in the

Contract shall relieve the Vendor from his responsibility to pay any tax that

may be levied in India on income and profits made by the Vendor in

respect of this contract.

ii. The Vendor’s staff, personnel and labour will be liable to pay personal

income taxes in India in respect of such of their salaries and wages as are

chargeable under the laws and regulations for the time being in force, and

the Vendor shall perform such duties in regard to such deductions thereof

as may be imposed on him by such laws and regulations.

57. Tender Fee:

The same should be furnished by the Bidders in the form of Demand Draft/ Bankers’ Cheque as mentioned in part II. It should be enclosed with Technical Bid. The Bids without tender fee will not be considered valid.

58. Notices:

Any notice given by one party to the other pursuant to this contract shall be sent to other party in writing or by Fax and confirmed in writing to



other Party’s address. The notice shall be effective when delivered or on the notice’s effective date whichever is later.

*******



Part-II

SCHEDULE OF EVENTS

Sl No

Particulars Remarks

1 Contact details of issuing department (Name, Designation, Mobile No., Email address for sending any kind of correspondence regarding this RFP)

DC & BCM Department Address: State Bank Global IT Center Sector 11, CBD Belapur, Navi Mumbai,400614. Contact Person Details: Name: Mr. Devesh Gupta / Mr Narender Goshika Email:[email protected]; [email protected] Cc: [email protected]

Mobile: 9867568362, 7506250822

2 Bid Document Availability including changes/amendments, if any to be issued

RFP may be downloaded from

Bank’s website

https://www.sbi.co.in procurement

news from 18/12/2017(Monday) to

09-01-2018 (Tuesday)

2a Dates for Site Visit to Survey/ BoQ / Site Layout/ drawings etc

20/12/2017(Wednesday) to

22/12/2017(Friday)

3 Last date for requesting clarification

Upto 6:00pm on 29/12/2017 (Friday) All communications regarding points / queries requiring clarifications shall be given in writing or by e-mail

4 Pre - bid Meeting at (venue)

From 2:30pm to 3:30pm on 02/01/2018(Tuesday) at GITC Belapur

5 Clarifications to queries raised at pre-bid meeting will be provided by the Bank.

04/01/2018 (Thursday)

6 Last date and time for Bid submission

03:30pm on 09/01/2018 (Tuesday)

7 Address for submission of Bids GITC, CBD Belapur

8 Date and Time of opening of Technical Bids

04:00pm on 09/01/2018 (Tuesday) Authorized representatives of vendors may be present during opening of the Technical Bids. However, Technical Bids would be opened even in the absence of any or all of the vendor representatives.

9 Opening of Indicative Commercial 11:00am on 15/01/2018 OR

mailto:[email protected]



http://www.sbi.co.in/



Bids On a subsequent date which will be communicated to such Bidders who qualify in the Technical Bid.

10 Reverse Auction 12:30pm on 15/01/2018 OR On a subsequent date which will be communicated to such Bidders who qualify in the Technical Bid.

11 Tender Fee Amount Rs.NIL

12 Earnest Money Deposit Rs. 30 Lakh (For 3 Months)

Validity period from the date of Bid opening -

13 Performance Bank Guarantee 10% of Contract Value for 3 years

Validity period from the date of purchase order

14 Price validity from the date of price discovery

180 days

15 Contact details of agency appointed for conducting Reverse Auction

AuctionTiger

16 Delivery schedule/ Timeline for Solution:

6 weeks

17 Terms of payment 80% of the contract amount will be released after successful installation & commissioning and on submission of PBG along-with submission of installation report. Remaining 20% will in arrears during remaining period

The product should be under warranty for 3 years (1 year extend warranty) 2% per quarter in arrears starting after end of 9 months from the date of successful Installation/ Commissioning of the solution.

18 Delivery locations GITC Belapur

19 Liquidated damages A sum equivalent to 1 % per week or part thereof of contract price subject to maximum deduction of 10% of the delivered price of the delayed Product or unperformed services for each week or part thereof of delay.

20 Transition Penalty (Refer Part-1, point No 47 sub point no (vi).

10% of the total Project Cost.



ANNEXURE–A BID FORM (TECHNICAL BID)

[On Company’s letter head] (to be included in Technical Bid Envelope)

Date:_______________

To: < address of tendering office > Dear Sir, Ref: RFP No. SBI/GITC/DC & BCM/2017-18/456 : 18/12/2017 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ We have examined the above RFP, the receipt of which is hereby duly acknowledged and subsequent pre-bid clarifications/ modifications / revisions, if any, furnished by the Bank and we offer to supply, Install, test, commission and support the desired Solution detailed in this RFP. We shall abide by the terms and conditions spelt out in the RFP. We shall participate and submit the commercial Bid through online auction to be conducted by the Bank’s authorized service provider, on the date advised to us. 2. While submitting this Bid, we certify that:

▪ The undersigned is authorized to sign on behalf of the VENDOR and the necessary support document delegating this authority is enclosed to this letter.

▪ We declare that we are not in contravention of conflict of interest obligation mentioned in this RFP.

▪ Indicative prices submitted by us have been arrived at without agreement with any other Bidder of this RFP for the purpose of restricting competition.

▪ The indicative prices submitted by us have not been disclosed and will not be disclosed to any other Bidder responding to this RFP.

▪ We have not induced or attempted to induce any other Bidder to submit or not to submit a Bid for restricting competition.

▪ The rate quoted in the indicative price Bids are as per the RFP and subsequent pre-Bid clarifications/ modifications/ revisions furnished by the Bank, without any exception.

3. If our offer is accepted, we undertake to complete the formalities for supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the Solution within the period specified in this document.

4. We agree to abide by all the Bid terms and conditions, contents of Service

Level Agreement as per sample available at Annexure-J of this document and the rates quoted therein for the orders awarded by the Bank up to the period prescribed in the Bid, which shall remain binding upon us.



5. Until a formal contract is prepared and executed, this Bid, together with your written acceptance thereof and your notification of award, shall constitute a binding Contract between us.

6. We undertake that, in competing for (and, if the award is made to us, in

executing) the above contract, we will strictly observe the laws against fraud and corruption in force in India namely “Prevention of Corruption Act 1988”.

7. We undertake that we will not offer, directly or through intermediaries,

any bribe, gift, consideration, reward, favour, any material or immaterial benefit or other advantage, commission, fees, brokerage or inducement to any official of the Bank, connected directly or indirectly with the bidding process, or to any person, organisation or third party related to the contract in exchange for any advantage in the bidding, evaluation, contracting and implementation of the contract.

8. We undertake that we will not resort to canvassing with any official of

the Bank, connected directly or indirectly with the bidding process to derive any undue advantage. We also understand that any violation in this regard, will result in disqualification of bidder from further bidding process.

9. We certify that we have not made any changes in the contents of the RFP

document read with its amendments/clarifications provided by the Bank submitted by us in our Bid document.

10. It is further certified that the contents of our Bid are factually correct. We also

accept that in the event of any information / data / particulars proving to be incorrect, the Bank will have the right to disqualify us from the Bid.

11. We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest or any Bid you

may receive and you may reject all or any Bid without assigning any reason or giving any explanation whatsoever.

12. We hereby undertake that our name does not appear in any “Caution” list of

RBI / IBA or any other regulatory body for outsourcing activity. 13. If our Bid is accepted, we undertake to enter into and execute at our cost,

when called upon by the Bank to do so, a contract in the prescribed form and we shall be jointly and severally responsible for the due performance of the contract.

14. The name(s) of successful Bidder to whom the contract is finally awarded

after the completion of bidding process shall be displayed on the website of the Bank and/or communicated to the successful Bidder(s).

15. The commercial bidding process will be through the reverse auction

process to be conducted by the Bank or a company authorized by the Bank. We understand that our authorized representative who would participate in



the reverse auction process would be possessing a valid digital certificate for the purpose.

16. We hereby undertake and agree to abide by all the terms and conditions

stipulated by the Bank in the RFP document. Dated this ....... day of ............................ 201 ______________________________________________________________ (Signature) (Name) (In the capacity of) Duly authorised to sign Bid for and on behalf of ______________________________________

Seal of the company.



Annexure-B

Bidder’s Eligibility Criteria

Bidders meeting the following criteria are eligible to submit their Bids along with supporting documents. If the Bid is not accompanied by all the required documents supporting eligibility criteria, the same would be rejected: Commercial:

S. No.

Eligibility Criteria Compliance (Yes/No)

Documents to be submitted

1. The Bidder must be an Indian firm / company/ organization registered under applicable Act in India.

Copy of the Partnership deed/Bye Law/ Certificate of Incorporation issued by Registrar of Companies along with Memorandum & Articles of Association and full address of the registered office.

2. The bidders should be OEM for critical systems in the IBMS solution for Data Centre

PO Copies / Completion Certification to be attached with self attestation. Proof to be submitted with Self declaration.

3. The Bidder must have an average turnover of minimum Rs.1 crore during last 3 financial year(s) [2014- 15, 2015-16, 2016-17]

Copy of the audited Balance Sheet and / or Certificate of the Charted Accountant for preceding three years.

4. The Bidder should be profitable organization (on the basis of PAT for at least 3 out of last 4 financial years.

Copy of the audited balance sheets along with profit and loss statement for corresponding years and / or Certificate of the Charted Accountant

5. Bidder should have experience of minimum 5 years in providing the Solution/services.

Copy of the order and / or Certificate of completion of the work. The Bidder should also furnish user acceptance report.

6. The OEM should be a company and have a local presence of support center with level 2/ 3 (highest escalation) resources available locally.

Bidder should specifically confirm on their letter head in this regard.

7. The bidder should have successfully completed IBMS Projects to the tune of not less than Rs. 500 Lacs in last 3 years as on 31st March 2017

Details List of projects to be attached with Self Attestation with IBMS Solution offering including details.



8. Client references and contact details (email/ landline/ mobile) of customers for whom the Bidder has executed similar projects. (Start and End Date of the Project to be mentioned) in the past (At least 3 client references are required)

1. 2. 3.

9. Deployment Methodologies Documents on deployment framework, tools, templates & utilities to be provided.

10. Past/present litigations, disputes, if any (Adverse litigations could result in disqualification, at the sole discretion of the Bank)

Brief details of litigations, disputes, if any are to be given on Company’s letter head.

11. Bidders should not have been blacklisted for deficiency in service by any Public Sector Bank during the last 3 years.


12. The Bidder should agree to the terms and conditions of Service Level Agreement (format placed at Annexure-J), should they become L1 in the reverse auction to execute a contract with the Bank.


13. The Bidder should not have any Service Level Agreement pending to be signed with the Bank for more than 6 months from the date of issue of purchase order issued by any of the Department at SBI GITC as on the date of Bid submission. [No change/ addition or deletion to be made by the Bidder to any of the clauses.]


Documentary evidence must be furnished against each of the above criteria along with an index. All documents must be signed by the authorized signatory of the Bidder. Relevant portions, in the documents submitted in pursuance of eligibility criteria, should be highlighted. Signature Seal of Company


Annexure-C

Bill of material/Bill of Quantity and Technical & Functional Specifications

Annexure-C

Technical & Functional Specifications

Sr. No

Required Functionalities/ Features

Compliance (Yes/No) and Supporting Documents

Available as part of solution (Yes/No)

Will be Provide as Customization (Yes/No)

Will be provided as Third Party Solution

Feasible (Yes/No)

1. BMS – features

1.1 Should be based on “open” network architecture, either LONWORKS or BACNET

Interface with -DDC Controls for Control / / monitoring of:

i. HVAC

• AHU

• PAC

• Split AC ii. Electrical Systems

• LT breakers

• DG Breakers

• DG’s

• PDU’

• UPS

iii. Fire Protection systems Dedicated S/w level Protocol



Sr. No






Feasible (Yes/No)

integrators for intelligent 3rd Party Systems:

• FAS

• HSSD

Single Graphics Interface to the user for Control and monitoring

SMS & Email alarm notification

Listing and/or approval from: UL Underwriters Lab. Inc FM Factory Mutual

Displayed graphic symbols generally valid standard for HVAC symbols (DIN 19227) and ASHRAE guidelines

Multiple user operation with multiple roles & rights

Integration with Existing equipment/ Components not supplied by the primary manufacturer to share common software for network communications, time scheduling, alarm handling, and history logging



Sr. No






Feasible (Yes/No)

Calendar Setting capability:

• Fully support all BACnet Schedule, Calendar, and Command objects.

• Daily and Weekly schedules

• Ability to combine multiple points into a logical Command Groups for ease of scheduling

• Schedule predefined reports.

• Ability to schedule for a at least

• Ten years in advance.

• Filtering capabilities of schedules, based on name, time, frequency, and schedule.

• Sorting capabilities of schedules, based on name, time and type of schedule.

Security

Use access with different rights like

• Admin

• Program and graphics creation

• User for change or adjust set points

• Guest

Alarm handling

• Alarm generation

• Message handling

• Alarm routing

• Alarm message escalation setup

• Alarm management strategy



Sr. No






Feasible (Yes/No)

Event management Event Routing and sorting Event Notification Event acknowledge

Report generation Standard report templates Customized report templates

Remote operation Via web browser Dedicated Desktop Installed client Windows Desktop APP

Trend Data Analysis Simultaneous, multiple trends Freely assign trend data Decentralized data storage Record history data, trend Intermediate storage of history data

Runtime tantalization

1.2 DIGITAL RODENT REPELLENT SYSTEM

capable to regulate the wave density, speed, with a combination of 45 such patterns(Minimum).

Does transducers produce very high frequency variable sound waves (above 20 Khz) continuously

Does controller shall have LCD display



Sr. No






Feasible (Yes/No)

Does controller cover area of about 10000 sqf

Modbus output for BMS integration

Frequency band of > 20 KHz and <60 KHz is pre tuned for 100 different frequencies

1.3 HIGH SENSITIVITY SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM

NEPA -72 Aspirating Detection Systems compliant

LASER / LED- based Smoke Detectors

comply one or more of the following codes and standards : NFPA Standards, US British Standards, BS 5839 part :1

All the equipments be tested, approved, and/or listed by :

LPCB (Loss Prevention Certification Board), UK

FM Approved for hazardous locations Class 1,Div 2

UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.), US

ULC (Underwriters Laboratories Canada), Canada

Vds (Verband der Sachversicherer e.V), Germany

Programmable level setting for



Sr. No






Feasible (Yes/No)

obscuration sensitivities (obscuration / meter)

Graphical Display for fault report

Notification for filter contamination / blockage in holes

Does it have a failsafe technology to verify true fire/smoke alarm conditions

Event log facility with date & time stamp

Fault Indicator / Disabled indicator.

Reset Button– Unlatches all latched alarm and faults

Disable Button– Disables the fire relay outputs from actuating and indicates a fault

1.4 DIGITAL WATER LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM

LCD display Supervising Panel LCD display (4 lines X 20 characters) with backlight and a 90dB max. buzzer with silencing button. LEDs indicating “POWER” (green), “LEAK” (red) and “TROUBLE” (red). (ie: “TROUBLE” means either cable break or power failure). an audible alarm upon detecting a “LEAK” and/or “TROUBLE”



Sr. No






Feasible (Yes/No)

Sense cable capable of branching, jumpering, and zoning

Each sense cable capable to perform following functions: • Locate and Detect liquid leaks to the nearest metre. • Detect a cut or break in the cable (cable break) • Communicate all the information to the Master panel & Supervisory Panel • Simultaneous leaks at multiple locations shall be generated. • The sense cable will be inflammable and fixed using holds down clips. • Each sense cable shall transmit information on the type of defect: leak, located to the nearest metre with the date and time of the fault.

Network Master Panel & Supervisory Panel

The Network master & Supervisory Panel to be able to manage up to 100 Modules and receive 100 simultaneous pieces of information. capable of monitoring 20,000 m of sensing cable



Sr. No






Feasible (Yes/No)

Capable to interface with BMS through standard protocol (Modbus IP/ BacNet IP)

Each Module having its own identity or address,

Capable to have Event History Minimum 896 Events

Failed-Safe Loop Back

1.5 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM & DETECTION SYSTEM

Able to support independent gas release circuits for activation of Fire Suppression system and further extend fire and fault output to the BMS for critical alarm monitoring

System and component compliance with the UL

basic system comprises of main Addressable Intelligent fire alarm panels, Repeater Panels, Network Repeaters, Touch Screen Display.

Initiation Device Circuits (IDC) be wired Class A (NFPA Style D) as part of an addressable device connected by the SLC Circuit

Hazmat ICONs conform to NFPA standard 170 format

Local Fire Control Panel “UL” 1076



Sr. No






Feasible (Yes/No)

Perpetual License Patches/ Newer version Freely

available

2 IP- Digital CCTV

2 Mega Pixel 25FPS

OEM applicable Standards (All Camera) CE Compliant and UL Listed and FCCB

DVMS software 1. 64-bit support

a. All server components should be available in 64-bit versions.

2. Management server To control the DVMS - Event server service -Log server service -Service channel service -Data collector server service

2.1 IP varifocal Dome Day/Night Very High Resolution (2MP or above) WDR Indoor Camera

1/3" 2MP Progressive CMOS

Wide Dynamic range should be120dB or above



Sr. No






Feasible (Yes/No)

Color mode: 0.15 Lux (30IRE) Black & white mode: 0Lux (IR LED on)

2.8 ~ 12 mm (4.3x) motorized varifocal, Auto Iris lens

Field View H: 109.7° ~ 26.0° / V: 60.8° ~ 15. 2° / D: 131.3° ~ 30.1°

0° ~ 350° / 0° ~ 67°

Automatic Gain Control, BLC, White balance: On/Off

3D Noise reduction: ON/Off

Tamper Detection: On/Off

Compression : Dual stream, H.265

Max Resolution : 1920 X 1080@25fps

Built-in Multi-zone motion detection

Unicast, Multicast, RTP, TCP, UDP, HTTP, IGMP, ICMP, DHCP, DNS

10/100 Base-T Ethernet via RJ-45 connector

S/N Ratio: 2D and 3D digital noise reduction

IR viewable length 20m

At least one potential free Alarm IN and one Alarm out

Privacy masking zones

PoE (IEEE802.3af, Class3), 12V DC

Operating Temp: -10° C to 55° C (14° F



Sr. No






Feasible (Yes/No)

to 131° F)

Humidity : 90% (Non-condensing

UL,CE and FCC certified

ONVIF Compliance

Warranty: Minimum 3 years from OEM

LDC support (Lens Distorsion Correction)

2.2 IP varifocal Bullet Day/Night Very High Resolution (2MP or above) WDR

Privacy Mask Zones: Required

Unicast, Multicast, RTP, TCP, UDP, HTTP, IGMP, ICMP, DHCP etc. as per system requirement


10/100 Base-T Ethernet via RJ-45 connecter

S/N Ratio: >50db


H.265, MJPEG/Multiple streaming

Alarm I/O :Input 1 / Output 1


Ingress Protection: IP66

Mechanical (Vandal) Protection

:IK10

Operating Temp :30° C to 55° C (-



Sr. No






Feasible (Yes/No)

22° F to 131° F)

Humidity : 90% (Non-condensing)


2.3 Network hardware 24 port Gigabit switch stackable PoE with additional 4 SFP ports (Layer2)

Connectivity

10/100/1000Base-T- 24 Ports

4 SFP slot 1000Base-SFP

Performance

FLASH 32mb

DRAM 128mb

Switch fabric speed,Gbps-56

Forwarding Rate (Mpps)-42

Packet buffer,Bytes-1.5M

Jumbo Frame-12K

MAC address Table-16K shared

Resilience and availability

IEEE 802.1D STP/802.1w RSTP/802.1s MSTP

IEEE 802.3ad LACP(max # trunks/links per trunk) 16/8

LLDP

Loop guard

Traffic control



Sr. No






Feasible (Yes/No)

802.1Q VLANs-4K

Port-based VLAN

Protocol-based VLAN

IP subnet based VLAN

Voice VLAN

Mac VLAN

GVRP

802.1ad Vlan Stacking (QinQ)

Selective QinQ

Security

Layer 2 MAC filtering

BPDU Tunnel

Login authentication and authorization by RADIUS and TACACS+

TACACS+ accounting/ auditing

SSH v1/v2

DHCP/DHCPv6 snooping

IP/IPv6 Source Guard

port security

Quality of Service

802.1p Priority Queues per Port-8

802.1p Queuing method

Trusted COS/TOS/IP Precedence/DSCP/Port

Broadcast Storm Control

Rate Limiting, port based

Queuing method( SP/WRR/ SP



Sr. No






Feasible (Yes/No)

+WRR) Layer 2 & Layer 3 Multicast

Multicast VLAN

IGMP Query

IGMP Snooping (v1,v2,v3)

IPv6 MLD v1/v2 Snooping

Layer 3 IPv6

IPv4/IPv6 Dual Protocol Stack

IPv6 address

Manageability

Console Port

Web Interface

Management through console, telnet, SNMP

TFTP/FTP

Configuration backup and restore

DHCP Client/Relay/Server

DHCP option 43/60/82

DHCPv6 option37/38

DHCPv6 Relay/Server

NTP

Port Mirroring

RSPAN

OAM EFM/CFM

Physical

Dimensions (Width x Height x Depth) 442mm x 43.6mm x 220mm

Operating Temperature-0℃ ~ 50℃

Power Supply-AC



Sr. No






Feasible (Yes/No)

Electrical

Maximum Power Consumption, Watts-20W

3 Access Control System

I-class card Reader with certifications Certification UL / CE/FCC / IP55

Biometric, Pin & card Reader (All in One Reader)

Intelligent System Controllers (ISC's)

comply with at least two standards:

CE C-Tick UL

Intelligent System Controllers - Distributed intelligence Ethernet Communications Local Alarm Input and Output LED diagnostics Auto Discovery Dual Reader Interface Module Eight Reader Interface Module Input / Output control module Remote Arming Terminal

I-class Card Reader Contactless smart card readers comply with ISO 15693 plug & Play type with suitable locking devices



Sr. No






Feasible (Yes/No)

3x4 keypad for PIN operation. The keypad including 4 bit or 8 bit bursts for every key press. read range of 5 cm – 7.5 cm uses 64-bit (or above) authentication keys Verification Time should be < 1 second

Server / Client architecture

System Architecture using protocols: NetBEUI, IPX/SPX, TCP/IP

Encryption between the Server and each Client is configurable safeguarded using IPSec.

Client License (Min 3)

User Manual /Document

Signature and Seal of Company



Bill of material/Bill of Quantity

Please note that the make mentioned under “Make” , are indicative in their respective category, However, Other make which are equivalent and better in quality can also be proposed. For all the proposed elements the relevant datasheet & product feature must be submitted along with technical bid.

SL NO.

Description Qty Unit Qty Assessed

by Bidder

Make Supply Installation

Unit Rt (`)

Amt (`)

Unit Rt(`)

Amt (`)

COST SUMMARY

A Intelligent Addressable Fire Detection & Alarm system

- -

B Aspirating Smoke detection system - -

C Water Leak Detection System - -

D Rodent Repellent system - -

E Public Address System - -

F IP CCTV system - -

G Access Control System - -

H Building Management System

GRAND TOTAL WITH AMC Exclusive of applicable Tax

-

NOTE :

Making of shop drawings based on site condition & manufacturer's standards will be part of this scope, vendor to submit shop drawings, PDS , make list , sample board prior approval before ordering. Its vendor's responsibility to take care of each materials at site till handover to client. Also cost should be inclusive of following



All hardware related installation of any components of this scope should be part of this scope, like cable termination with PVC/ metal glands, back boxes etc

Packing and Forwarding Cost

Transportation cost till & within site

Loading unloading cost

Mathadi charge cost

Custom clearance Cost

Transit Insurance cost

Cost related to power, water, machinery, lifting equipment, tools, labours, consumable, & other related overheads

Material storage charges in case storage space not available at site

Material Storage insurance & Security Cost

Complete Erection and Commissioning Cost

Cost related to INSPECTION AND TESTING Cost

Note : JCI - Johnson Control India Pvt Ltd.

A Intelligent Addressable Fire Detection & Alarm system

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

1 Supply , Installation, Testing & Commissioning of UL listed and FM approved 4 Loop Analog Addressable Fire Alarm control panel having the capacity of 252 devices / detectors per loop any combination. The panel shall have 32 bit Central processor with 5000 Event History logging with On Line & Offline reports. and having large, 6" (15.2 cm) (1200 −x− 800 pixel)

1

No Siemens-Fire Finder / JCI Notifier 3030/ Simplex 4100U /Honeywell XLS



color liquid-crystal display (LCD), touch screen and LEDs for displaying system status. LCD Display status highlights Alarm events appear in red; Trouble events appear in yellow; Supervisory events in blue, and Security events in magenta. The panel shall have 12 Amps inbuilt power supply having charging capacity of maximum 100AH Lead Acid battery. In case of networking, the panel shall have network card included inside the panel for RS485 communication with other display devices like Graphic screen, repeater panel etc. The panel shall be modular and shall have the capacity of expanding up to 10 Loops and 2500 devices/detectors maximum. The panel shall support degrade mode operation and shall have battery backup of 24 hrs in normal condition and 30 minutes in Alarm condition.

2 Supply , Installation, Testing & Commissioning of UL Listed and FM approved Repeater Panel. The panel shall be able to give location of all fire and fault and Isolation conditions of addressable units of main Fire Alarm panel via the address codes. Panel shall have feature to Acknowledge/Silence/Reset. The panel shall have a LCD display and having maximum 160 (4 x 40) Characters in the display. ( BMS room 3rd Floor)

2

Nos Siemens-Fire Finder / JCI Notifier 3030/ Simplex 4100U /Honeywell

3 Separate Interface Mobus/Bacnet Card for each panel for BMS integration

1

Nos Siemens/Laurasoft/Simplex/Filed server/ Honeywell/JCI



6 Supply of UL listed and FM approved Intelligent Addressable multicriteria detector with Advanced Signal Analysis with Tri Colour LED & shall be polarity insensitive.

600

Nos Siemens / Notifier/ Simplex /Honeywell/JCI

7 Supply of UL listed and FM approved Single action Manual Pull Station. Shock and Vibration Resistant, Pull Down Lever Remains Down Until Reset and shall be Polarity Insensitive

50


8 Supply of UL listed Conventional Sounder cum Strobe having 8 different tone settings with range of 81 dbA to 92 dbA and field selectable 15/30/75/110 candelas.

15


9 Supply of UL listed Conventional Hooter different tone settings with range of 81 dbA to 92 dbA.

20


10 Supply of UL listed and FM approved Intelligent addressable Output module for trigger Hooter & Hooter Cum Strobe etc. The relay and input are controlled at the same address and shall be Polarity Insensitive

30


11 Supply of UL listed and FM approved Intelligent addressable Output module having facility to PAC Trippings, Access Unlock & Gas Release etc. The relay and input are controlled at the same address and shall be Polarity Insensitive

80


12 Supply of UL listed and FM approved Intelligent addressable Input module having facility to Take input of Gas release and VESDA panel status monitoring same address and shall be Polarity Insensitive

35




13 Supply of UL listed and FM approved Intelligent addressable Isolator Module/Base .

35


13 Response Indicator 300

Nos Siemens / Notifier/ Simplex /Honeywell/ Agni/JCI

14 Supply & Installation of 2 Core x 1.5 Sq.mm armoured FRLS cable for looping the devices & providing power Supply to sounder cum strobes

12500

Mtrs Supercab/Masterflex/Polycab/Technoflex/Geoflex/Varsh /Finolex

15 Supply & Installation of 2 Kg Clean Agent Type Extinguishers

10

Nos Minimax/Safex/CeaseFire/Supremex

16 Supply & Installation of CO2 Type Extinguishers - 2.5 Kg

50


17 Supply & Installation of Fire Exit Signage boards with 3hrs battery backup

30


18 Supply & Installation of GLOW SIGNAGE 25

Nos Minimax/Safex/CeaseFire /Supremex

Total Exclusive of all applicable Tax - -

B Aspirating Smoke detection system

1 SITC of single zone, branched pipe two types of aspirating detector technology. These technologies are ‘Cloud Chamber’ aspirating detection identifying optically invisible fire particulate and laser or LED ‘Optical’ aspirating detection identifying small amounts of visible smoke.7” full colour multi-function touch screen LCD display,10,000 PCC to 10 million PCC 0 - 1000CFS (Combined Fire & Smoke scale).On-board animated fault diagnosis .

15

No Xtralis/Airsense/Cirrus /Honeywell/JCI



3 Power Supply and Battery Backup for 30 Minutes. 15

No Reputed listed make

4 Electronic sounder with strobe 15

No PCD/Ravel/Notifier/Honeywell/JCI

5 Sampling points 120

Nos Xtralis/Airsense/Cirrus /Honeywell/JCI

6 SITC of Sampling Pipes for Primary & Secondary Sampling, smooth Inner Bore 21mm ID and 25 mm outer dia, Sch.40, PVC Pipes with Fittings, Hi-quality Supports, accessories and Sealing compound; Red colour sampling point lables.

800

Mtrs Fusion Pipe/ Astral/BEC/Suprema/Prince/Polycab/Finolex

7 2CX1.5 sqmm armoured FRLS cable 1000

Mtrs Supercab/Masterflex /Polycab/ Technoflex/Geoflex /Varsh /Finolex

Total Exclusive of Tax and Duty - -

C WATER LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM

1 Main Leak Detection Panel - 12" Touch Screen Panel installed in metal enclosure with power supply, RS232 / RS485 converter, buzzer, field wire termination with Module installed. Panel is 12" full color, high resolution SVGA display Touch Screen Panel provides a Graphic user interface to manage and display information from a network of up to 20 external leak detection circuits with in Built TCP-IP Port.

1

No. Synopsis/Star/Elsa

2 Supervising Panel with LCD Display (4 Lines*20 English Display): monitor up to 100 of locating panels/modules. Powered with 230 VAC. Dust and

1




splash proof IP65 protection & Capable of monitoring 20,000 meters of Sensing Cable,Once the alarm condition has been cleared, the System shall be capable to reset itself automatically. Fail Safe Loop Back system to be provided. The Panel shall have the event history minimum 896 events

3 Liquid Leak Locating Zonal Module (RS485 Modbus+1 relay without Buzzer) 200 Meters Sensing capability. Should be powered with 230 VAC, provision for adjusting the sensitivity. ( Fail safe loop back system.) If there is a cable break at any point along the sensing cable, the sensing cable length still in connection to the control units shall continue to function and detect leak (if any). This Fail-Safe Loop Back feature (Class A wiring) shall be incorporated as necessity to enhance the system capability. provision for adjusting the sensitivity

12 Nos.

Synopsis/Star/Elsa

4 NEMA-4X Enclosure 12 Nos Synopsis/Star/Elsa

5 Modular Leader cable shall be a minimum 3 mtrs connection cable with one end prepared for connection to terminals in control panel / module, and with socket-type plastic connector at other end to connect to the sensor cable / jumper cable.

12

Nos.

Synopsis/Star/Elsa

6 The water sensing cable shall be resistant to corrosion. It shall detect the presence of Water as well as slightly corrosive & conductive fluids. The cable shall be constructed of total four wires (two sensing wires and 1 no of Continuity wire & 1 no. of return insulated wires. The cable shall be constructed with no metal parts exposed to the environment.



i. Water Sensing cable, 3 meters / 10 feet 3 Nos Synopsis/Star/Elsa

ii. Water Sensing cable, 5 meters / 17 feet 3 Nos Synopsis/Star/Elsa

iii. Water Sensing cable, 10 meters / 33 feet 27 Nos Synopsis/Star/Elsa

iv. Water Sensing cable, 15 meters / 50 feet 2 Nos Synopsis/Star/Elsa

v. Water Sensing cable, 20 meters / 66 feet 15 Nos Synopsis/Star/Elsa

7 RS485 Communication and Power Wire, 250 ft min. 1250 Mtrs Synopsis/Star/Elsa/Belden

8 Connectors - Use Jumper cable connector kit only if installing connector kits on bulk sensing cable.

62

Nos Synopsis/Star/Elsa

9 Jumper cables (nonsensing cable between module and areas monitored) to make connections between sensing cable and alarm module. Cable has four color-coded 18 AWG conductors.

1000

Mtrs Synopsis/Star/Elsa/Belden

10 Modular Branch Connector - Allows a “T” or branch in the sensing circuit. Has pin-type plastic connector to connect to cable from alarm module, two socket-type plastic connectors to connect branches. Wires the branches in series and adds a simulated length of 4 m (13 ft) on each branch to make clear division between areas.

10 Nos Synopsis/Star/Elsa

11 Weighted length Simulates 4 m (13 ft) of sensing cable. Makes a clear division between separate areas in a locating system.

10 Nos Synopsis/Star/Elsa

12 Hold-down clips to attach on sensing cables to flat surfaces. To be applied after every 1 meter of Sensing cable

7

Packet

Synopsis/Star/Elsa



13 High-visibility yellow tags to identify sensing cable and record mapped distance. Package contains a permanent marker. Tag attaches to sensing cable by sticking on itself. Use a tag on each length of cable and at mapping points. To be applied after every 3 mtrs.

4

Packet

Synopsis/Star/Elsa

14 Terminates sensing circuit (Endcaps); has pin-type plastic connector. Required at end of sensing circuit and ends of all branches.

22


Total Exclusive of Tax and Duty - -

D Rodent Repellant system

1 SITC of The controller should support upto 12 transducers in dedicated connection & 15 transducers in single loop @ 300 sq.ft each for Room Void Area & 150 sq.ft each for Ceiling & Floor Void .

28

No R Scat /MASER/ STAR

-

2 Each transducer should cover an area upto 300 sq.ft in Room Void and 150 sq.ft in Ceiling & Floor Void. Looping permitted.

383

Nos R Scat /MASER/ STAR

-

3 2C x 14/40 SWG Copper Cable of 0.5 sq.mm 7000 Mtrs RScat /MASER /STAR

-

4 20mm PVC Conduit 5000

Mtrs BEC/AKG -

5 Bracket Stand 28 Nos R Scat /MASER/ STAR

-

Total Exclusive of All applicable Tax - -

E Public Address System

1 Call station



1 Supplying, installing, testing and commissioning of 2 zone paging microphone (call station) with necessary Zone wise, Group Zones and all call facility. The Microphone should have LED Indication, Can be Expand with additional units, Compress function through microphone input to avoid distortion, Auxiliary input which supply local background music. Power 24V DC, Microphone should be able to Control the Music also. Microphone Should supply with all accessories and with standard specification, complete.

1

No HEINRICH/BOSCH / ATIES /Honeywell/JCI

2 Amplifier

2.1 SITC of 480W Plena Mixing Amplifier, 70V/100V 4-16 ohm speaker outputs, Isolated transformer for human safety, Balanced XLR type line input and unbalanced phone jack line input, protection of over heat, over load, clip & short circuit, Indications for power, signal, clip, protection and temp, Frequency Response 60Hz - 15kHz, S/N ratio>70dB, THD<0.1%, Power Supply 230V AC,

3

Nos HEINRICH/BOSCH / ATIES /Honeywell/JCI

3 Speakers

1.1 SITC of 6W Recessed Ceiling speakers with following features:-Speaker Drive 6", Complete Aluminum grille and Metal baffle, line matching transformer 100/70V line. Variable wattage tappings of 6 / 3 / 1.5, Effective frequency range 110-15kHz, SPL@1m/1W=91dB, Peak SPL 97dB complete with necessary mounting hardware & accessories

275




1.2 SITC of 6W Wall mounted speakers with following features:-Speaker Drive 6", Complete Aluminum grille and Metal baffle, line matching transformer 100/70V line. Variable wattage tappings of 6 / 3 / 1.5, Effective frequency range 110-15kHz, SPL@1m/1W=91dB, Peak SPL 97dB complete with necessary mounting hardware & accessories

5


4 2 core 1.0 sq mm armoured FRLS 4500 Mtrs Supercab/Masterflex/Polycab/Technoflex/Geoflex/ Varsh/Finolex

6 SITC of 19-inch Equipment Rack with standardized frame or enclosure for mounting multiple PA controllers, FM sources, Amplifiers etc modules.

1

set VALRACK/ APW/ RITTAL/ WD/

42U will be provided by the Bank

Total Exclusive of All applicable Tax - -

F IP CCTV system

IP CAMERA

1 SITC of IP , Vari-focal Auto Iris 2 mega Pixel Dome camera having Full HD 1920 X 1080@25fps,2Megapixel Internet Protocol (IP) based Varifocal lens Bullet Camera (2.8~12 mm), ROHS/UL Certified. Digital noise reduction

105

Nos SAMSUNG/SONY/PELCO/AXIS/Honeywell/JCI

2 SITC of IP,Vandal Proof, weather proof, Vari-focal 2.0 mega Pixel bullet camera activepixe 1920X1080@25fps,2.0Megapixel Internet Protocol (IP) based Varifocal lens Bullet Camera (2.8~12 mm), ROHS/UL Certified. Digital noise reduction,

25

Nos SAMSUNG/SONY/PELCO/AXIS/Honeywell/JCI

3 VIDEO MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE



i Network Video Management Software expandable capability up to 300 cameras in Single Directory; Virtual Matrix capability; Maps and alarm management etc. Open Protocol ONVIF Compliant system architecture :-complete with all necessary licenses etc, minimum as per below : :-Camera Licenses for 110 Cameras. :-Redundancy Feature at Database and Recording server Failsafe mode. :-Minimum 2 Admin User Licenses

1

Set Siemens/Milestone/Dvtel/Honeywell/JCI

4 SERVER AND STORAGE

i Video Management Server -rack mount Server Hardware for Recording - Single CPU - Intel Xeon E5-2690 v4 2.6GHz,35M Cache,9.60GT/s QPI,Turbo,HT,14C/28T RAM – 32 GB (16 x 2 NOs)

1

Nos FUJITSU/HP/DELL

ii Network Attached Storage - NAS Storage, NAS shall have a storage capacity of 60TB so as to record at 2MP resolution, H.265 compression and 25 fps per camera for backup of 90 days at an average of 15 hours/day recording for Non-Data center rooms , H.265 compression and 25 fps per camera for backup of 90 days at an average of 10 hours/day recording . (The Bidder should submit the required storage & bandwidth calculation as per their proposed system to meet the requirement as per specifications). Bidder should ensure that NAS box and HDD should be sourced as one package from the same OEM only. Capable of Redundant power

1

Nos Netapp/EMC2/Fujitsu/HP/Huawei



supply etc. Tape backup Drive device - LTO-6

5 Client Workstation: Intel Core i7 Desktops PC (Certified for Microsoft windows), 1TB SATA HDD - 7200 RPM or higher, 8GB(1x8GB), DDR3 - 1600 MHz RAM/ DDR4 - 2133MHz RAM, expandable to 16 GB or more with minimum 2 DIMM slots, 21” TFT Color Monitor (TCO 05 Certified), Graphic Card - 1GB NVIDIA Quadro 600 104 keys USB Keyboard, USB Optical Scroll Mouse, 100/1000 MBPS DUAL STACK NETWORK INTERFACE CARD (IPV4/IPV6 SUPPORTED), MINIMUM 1 SERIAL, 1 PARALLEL, 6 USB PORTS (2 Front, 4 Back), Windows 10 Professional 64 bit license

2

Nos FUJITSU/HP/DELL/ACER

6 42" colour, Flat Screen Type Professional CCTV Surveillance HD monitor for above client workstation

4

Nos Samsung/LG/NEC/Panaonic/Sony

Network Switches and accessories

7 SITC of 24 port layer 2 switch with 10/100/1000 POE Switches and with two 1000base Copper/ Fiber uplink ports as per Site requirement at Filed IP devices.

6

Nos HP/Cisco/Brocade/Digisol/Huawei

8 SITC of 24 port layer 2 switch with 10/100/1000 Switches and with two 1000base Copper/ Fiber uplink ports as per Site requirement at Main control room/BMS room

2

Nos HP/Cisco/Brocade/Digisol/Huawei



9 19 inch rack mount console unit - 22 U for Layer 2 switches on field.

2 Nos VALRACK/APW/RITTAL/WD

42U Rack will be provided by the Bank

10 19 inch rack mount console unit - 9 U for Layer 2 switches on field.

6 Nos VALRACK/APW/RITTAL/WD

42U Rack will be provided by the Bank

11 Console desk for Operators at BMS room for 2 workstation and 4 monitors

2

Nos Reputed Already Available in Bank

Conduit AND CABLS

12 Supply & laying of Cat 6 UTP cable with all termination crimping etc.

8000

Mtrs Belden / Commscope/ Systimax/Digilink /Molex/Digisol

13 25mm PVC Conduits with GI Saddle & Spacers, flexible extensions, back boxes and gang boxes, junction boxes with elemex terminals etc., complete as required to fulfill the desired objective of security cabling

7000

Mtrs BEC / VIP / Universal / Precision

14 Require Passive accessories for Cat6 and Fiber cable , RJ-45 Connectors, Splicing, LIU,LIU panel, Fiber tech cord, Copper Patch cord require for Above switches and Cameras.

1

Lot Belden / Commscope/ Systimax/Digilink /Molex/Digisol

Total Exclusive of Tax and Duty -

-

G ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

1 Central Control System

1.1 Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of Central Server for loading Access Management software-ACS (Primary) • DUAL CPU, E5-2603 ( 1.6 GHZ , 6 CORE) • 16 GB RAM • 4 x 500 GB (or above) 10K RPM (RAID 1) HDD -

1

Nos HP/DELL/Fujitsu/IBM/Huawei



OS/ Application • Windows server 2012 64 bit • SQL server 2012 • Standard mouse, keyboard, video card and colour monitor • Ports At least one network connection (as outlined above)

1.2 Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of Central Server for loading Access Management software-ACS (Redundant) • DUAL CPU, E5-2603 ( 1.6 GHZ , 6 CORE) • 16 GB RAM • 4 x 500 GB (or above) 10K RPM (RAID 1) HDD - OS/ Application • Windows server 2012 64 bit • SQL server 2012 • Standard mouse, keyboard, video card and colour monitor • Ports At least one network connection (as outlined above)

1

Nos HP/DELL/Fujitsu/IBM/CISCO

1.3 Client Work Station for card enrollment with Following specifications Operating System Windows 10 Processor Intel i5 or higher RAM 8 GB Hard Drive 500 GB or higher Monitor SVGA or better Ports At least one network connection port to the Server PC. Standard mouse, keyboard, video card and color

2

Nos HP/DELL/Fujitsu/IBM/ACER



monitor

1.3 Web Camera for Photo capturing 2

Nos Samsung/Sony/Pelco/ Axis/Honeywell/JCI

1.3 Finger Print Scanner - ISO 19794(2) & ISO 19794(4) Compliant

2

Nos 3M, Cogent, SAFRAN Morpho, Futronics

1.3 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Access Control System Application cum Redundant Management Software & Door License with the capability to handle the readers, controllers & other devices in the system

1

Set Siemens/Honeywell/GE Lenel/Genetec/JCI

1.4 Microprocessor based Networkable 96 door Access Controller with Power Supply & Battery Charger and TCP/IP connectivity, Programmable communication encryption, Flash memory for application firmware complete with all accessories as required.

1

Set Siemens/Honeywell/GE Lenel/ Genetec/JCI

-

2 Field Devices -

2.1 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of 2 Door Reader Interface modules with wiegand interface, necessary inputs/outputs to connect exit switch & locks as required, power supply unit, battery backup, enclosures , mounting interfaces & RS485 port to connect to the IP based Central controller

39

Nos.

Siemens/Honeywell/GE Lenel/Genetec/JCI

-

2.2 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of iclass Smart Card readers with necessary mounting accessories

60

Nos.

HID/Rosellar/Morpho/Honeywell/JCI

-



2.3 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Biometric based Fingerprint reader with inbuilt iclass Smart Card reader & pinpad with necessary mounting accessories & power supply unit

11

Nos.

HID/Rosellar/Morpho/Invixium/Honeywell/JCI

-

2.4 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of iclass smart cards

500

Nos.

HID

2.5 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Door Magnetic contacts to monitor "door open too long" status.

67

Nos.

Algatec/BELL/Trimac/Ebelco

-

2.6 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of SS type Exit Push button for granting exit

15

Nos.

Algatec/Rosellar/Trimac/Ebelco

-

2.7 Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Emergency resettable break glass release units

28

Nos.

KAC/Rosellar/Dafikas

-

2.8 Panic Bar with Alarm and reset key at Emergency exit

7

Nos.

Dafikas/Boonadam/C-system

3 Locking Devices -

3.1 Single Leaf Electromagnetic Door Lock (600 Lbs) 20 Nos.

Algatec/BELL /Trimac/Ebelco

-

3.2 Double Leaf Electromagnetic Door Lock (600 Lbs) 25 Nos.

Algatec/BELL /Trimac/Ebelco

-

4 Cabling / Conduiting / Cable Trays -

4.1 4 Core 0.5 sq.mm. shielded armoured cable 1500

Mtrs.

Supercab/Masterflex/Polycab/ Technoflex

-

4.2 2 Core 1.0 sq.mm. shielded un-armoured cable 800

Supercab/Masterflex/ Polycab/Technoflex



4.3 8 Core 0.5 sq.mm. shielded armoured cable 2200

Mtrs.

Supercab/Masterflex/ Polycab/Technoflex

-

4.4 Cat 6E armoured cable 1200

Mtrs.

Supercab/Masterflex/Polycab/Technoflex

-

4.5 25mm PVC Conduits with GI Saddle & Spacers, flexible extensions, back boxes and gang boxes, junction boxes with elemex terminals etc., complete as required to fulfill the desired objective of security cabling

2000

Mtrs BEC / VIP / UNIVERSAL / PRECISION

-

Total Exclusive of All applicable Tax -

-

H Building management system

1 Client Workstation machine: INTEL CORE I7 or latest processor with minimum 12 GB DDR RAM , minimum 1TB SATA Hard Disk, DVD R/W, Lan Card 10/100/1000 base-T, Multi Monitor Support, Optical Mouse, 104 Keys Keyboard, latest windows OS compatible with BMS Software, high quality media graphics card, MS Office with Antivirus software.

2

Nos

HP / DELL/FUJITSU/Huawei

4 42" colour , Flat Screen Type Professional HD monitor for above client workstation

2

Nos SAMSUNG/LG/NEC/PANASONIC/SONY

5 A4 size Laserjet colour Printer suitable for the application, with driver software.

1

Nos HP/Epson/Canon

6 12 port layer 2 switch with 10/100/1000 Managed Switches

2

Nos HP/CISCO/BROCADE/DIGISOL



Integrated Software for IBMS ( Graphic Software)

5 Design, Supply, Install, Testing & Commissioning of Building Management software with Redundant feature. The software should be capable of generating reports as per client requirement mentioned in technical specification. The Software shall support a BACnet protocol which is an ASHRAE, ANSI and ISO standard protocol operating in three modes. It should be able to communicate & integrate with other protocols. Software should Interface/ Interpreter modules for communication with third party controllers for operation and monitoring of the system. Software should be designed and programmed with latest available technology and should have capability of future expansion as required. Alarm handling, scheduling, trending, reporting engine, database system, system activity log, historical data management, real time vector graphics, system backup and restore. The system should have AutoCad import function. The alarm & events shall be assisted treatment. Software graphics must be supporting 3D vector graphics inline with the details provided in technical specification. The system should have AutoCad import function. The alarm & events shall be assisted treatment. Software should be design for remote operation based on Web or Mobile communication. The

1

Set HONEYWELL/SIEMENS-Desigo CC/UTC - ALC / TRANE/JCI



software shall support 3500 software points, 2 Client stations, SMS /Email alert, FAS , ACS and Third party integration.

6 Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Portable Operator unit, BACnet/IP shall have Display with adjustable contrast • Energy saving LED backlight (series D and later) • Generic operation and display of plant functions (alarm handling, time schedulers, calendars, setpoint adjustments, display of current values, etc.) • Integrated acoustic and/or visual collective alarm • Graphic online-trend function • Capable to hook all DDC information in network • Ability to add or delete new users • Automatic logout • Heating curve graphics • System date and time setting • Context-sensitive help function

1

Nos HONEYWELL/SIEMENS / TRANE

7 Third Party Integration: The Protocol Integrator/ Convertor shall be Capable to Integrate Open protocol systems on BACnet /Modbus/LONWORKS/M-Bus/J-Bus Protocol Made available on IP, or on serial RS 485 / 232 interface.( Separate Integrator for each system)

San Telequip / Siemens/Honeywell/ALC/TRANE

a Integrator for Energy meters 6 Set

b Integrator for PAC units 1 Set

c Integrator for UPS 1 Set

e Integrator for Fire Alarm Integration 1 Set



f Integrator for DG set 1 Set

g Integrator for PDU 1 Set

h Integrator for Water leak detection 1 Nos

i Integrator for Aspiration detection 1 Nos

8 System interface unit as Bacnet router for connecting PDM (Process data Manager) to DDC controllers

R.O. Nos.

HONEYWELL/SIEMENS / TRANE /JCI

9 Direct Digital Controllers: BACnet/IP

Supply, Install, Test and Commissioning of Microprocessor based IP BASED DDC controller/panel with 1. must support BACnet/Lon communication protocol. 2. All panels shall be provided with a power failure/auto restart capability. 3. The capacity of each DDC controller/panel shall not more than 200 points or less than 12 points. 4. 10% spare capacity for each point type (i.e. AI, AO, DI, DO) should be allowed inside each DDC controller/panel rack for future expansion. The DDC should suppprt hot swappable IO. 5. IP 54 for indoor / IP 65 for exterior enclosure as suitable. Contractor to refer the I/O summary list provided for DDC panel configuration. Contractor to submit the detailed GA drawing for client approval prior manufacturing. The rate should include all type of supports required to complete the installation. The rate should include all other accessories as required to complete the installation as specified in



technical specification and drawings.

a DDC for Lighting Control 1 Lot Honeywell/Siemens / Trane /JCI

b DDC for Field devices 1 Lot Honeywell/Siemens / Trane /JCI

c DDC for Aspiration Smoke Detection system & Gas release status

1 Lot Honeywell/Siemens / Trane /JCI

d DDC for Split AC 1 Lot Honeywell/Siemens / Trane /JCI

e DDC for AHU 1 Lot Honeywell/Siemens / Trane /JCI

10 Field Sensors

a Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Duct Temp + RH Sensor

42 Nos.

Honeywell/Siemens / Trane / Sontay/JCI

b Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Duct Temperature Sensor

12 Nos.


c Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Air Differential Pressure Switch

12 Nos.


d Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Hydrogen sensor for Battery room

2 Nos.

Honeywell/Siemens / MSR / Sontay/JCI

e Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Room Co2 Sensor

11 Nos.

Honeywell/Siemens / Trane / Sontay/Jci

f Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Out door Temp and Rh sensor

3 Nos.


g Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Fuel disel Switch

2 Nos.

Honeywell/Siemens / Filpro/ Techtrol/JCI

11 Cable and Conduit



Cabling for instrument, controls, valves to DDCs and communication cabling from DDC to central equipment complete with earthing, supports etc complete. Laid on Surface / On Cable Trays. All Cables shall be ferruled and tagged, and shall use lugs for termination at both ends.

a 2 Core x 1 sq mm FRLS Al-Mylar Screened with drain wire, Armored Cable for control cabling

8500 Mtrs Supercab/Masterflex/Polycab/Technoflex/Geoflex/ Varsh/Finolex

b 4 Core x 1 sq mm FRLS Al-Mylar Screened with drain wire, Armoured Cable for control cabling

6500 Mtrs Supercab/Masterflex/Polycab/Technoflex/Geoflex/ Varsh/Finolex

e Communication cable: FRLS unarmoured Communication Cable Cat 6 / unarmoured Communication Cable 2 Twisted pair x 1.0 mm2 Multistranded Screened Communication cable with Al Mylar Tape and 0.5 mm2 Drain wire as per requirement by System.

900 Mtrs Belden / Commscope/Systimax/Digilink/Molex/Digisol

f 25mm PVC Conduits with GI Saddle & Spacers, flexible extensions, back boxes and gang boxes, junction boxes with elemex terminals etc., complete as required to fulfil the desired objective of security cabling

900 Mtrs BEC / VIP / UNIVERSAL / PRECISION

12 Perforated GI cable tray with Cover : complete with supports, all fittings and mounting accessories, etc complete to installation requirements.



a 125 mm x 50 mm x 2mm 25 Mtrs Profab/ ASIAN /RM CON/Pushpak

b 200 mm x 50 mm x 2 mm 200 Mtrs Profab/ ASIAN /RM CON/Pushpak

Total Exclusive of All Applicable Tax -

I AMC - Comprehensive maintenance

1.0 Comprehensive maintenance of the complete Extra Low Voltage system comprising of all components & equipment like Fire System, CCTV system, Networking Switches, VMS, server storage, Video wall , IBMS, Access control system, controller & software , WLD & FLD, Rodent, Gas suppression, ASD etc (as given below) after defect liability period.

2.0 1st Year after Defect Liability Period 1 Job Included

-

3.0 2nd Year after Defect Liability Period 1 Job Included

-

4.0 3rd Year after Defect Liability Period 1 Job -

Total Exclusive of All Applicable Tax -

-



Annexure-D

Bidder Details

Details of the Bidder

S. No. Particulars Details

1. Name

2. Date of Incorporation and / or

commencement of business

3. Certificate of incorporation

4. Brief description of the Bidder including

details of its main line of business

5. Company website URL

6. Particulars of the Authorized Signatory of

the Bidder

a. Name

b. Designation

c. Address

d. Phone Number (Landline)

e. Mobile Number

f. Fax Number

g. Email Address




Annexure-E

Scope of Work

Bank’s Data Centre in State Bank GITC is spread over 2 Floors and having existing setup of BMS, Access Control, File Alarm System, CCTV etc. Bank intends to revisit the exiting implementation for managing Data Centre facilities.

The selected Bidder will have to integrate the proposed solution with all the facility systems available in Data Centre. The details of existing system/equipment are as follows:

UPS Quantity Make & Model Location

400 KVA 2 Chloride / 90-NET 3rd Floor

100 KVA x 4 4 Numeric / Digital HPEi33 2nd & 3rd

200 KVA x 2 2 Numeric / Digital HPEi33 2nd Floor

125 KVA x 2 2 Numeric / Digital HPEi33 2nd Floor

40 KVA x 2 2 DB / Harmonys 3300 3rd Floor

PAC Quantity Make & Model Location

Stulz 1 Stulz / BAS221A 2nd – SR

Stulz 1 Stulz / BAS452A 2nd – SR

Emerson 8 Emerson / PEX245EC with ICOM 2nd Floor

Emerson 24 Emerson / Pex240FA-100 3rd Floor

Emerson 2 Emerson / Pex380FA-100 3rd Floor

AHU Quantity Make & Model Location

5.5 TR 4 Blue Star / DPA6615 2nd Floor

8.75 TR 4 Blue Star / DPA1052 2nd Floor

16 TR 2 Blue Star / DPA1983S 3rd Floor

22 TR 2 Blue Star / DPA2642S 3rd Floor

CAC Unit Quantity Make & Model

2 TR 8 Blue Star / CS241A 3rd Floor

Split Unit Quantity Make & Model

2.5 TR 4 Blue Star / KMHW301R-B 3rd Floor

2 TR 2 Blue Star / KHWE241R-B 3rd Floor

2 TR 3 Blue Star / 3HW24VA 2nd Floor

2 TR 20 Daikin / FT60MV16 2nd Floor

To understand and decide the deployment methodology, the Bidder should undertake a survey of the existing layout by visiting the site during any of days specified in the RFP. Based on the understanding and Industry’s Best Practices, Bidder will have to prepare a deployment architecture diagram to demonstrate to the Bank on Bidder’s capability for providing the cost effective solution and submit architecture blue print along with Technical Bid to the Bank.

Bill of Quantity / Bill of Material are devised on the basis of existing setup and considering the additional requirement in Data Centre. However, During the installation, some of the item/equipment may be used less than specified quantity in BoQ. Accordingly, the payment will be made on actual consumptions of such items/equipment.



Building Management System

Note: Detailed requirement of Software Solution/ services, installation, commissioning, training, support etc.

BMS incorporating direct digital control (DDC) for energy management, equipment monitoring and HVAC control, suitable for the building usage. The control strategies shall be developed to ensure that specified environmental conditions are maintained, whilst giving due regard to minimizing of energy consumption. The BMS supplies shall furnish and install a fully integrated BMS, wherein all the services to be monitored and integrated are distributed. The system design shall utilize the latest technology in “open” network architecture, either LONWORKS or BACNET with distributive intelligence and processing, and direct digital control. The BMS system offered should be from the latest offerings and should be freely programmable management and automation stations for the full spectrum of today’s building application services. The Building Management System supplier shall furnish and install a latest technology, high speed, networkable & interoperable, user friendly, fully integrated & Intelligent Building Automation System. The intent of this Tender specification is to procure a truly seamlessly integrated Building automation System that shall offer a Unified Platform to integrate various utilities that are already installed in the Data Centre spread in two floors. The System shall interface with various systems such as: - DDC Controls for Control / monitoring of:

iv. HVAC ▪ AHU ▪ Precision Air Conditioning (PAC)s ▪ Split ACs

v. Electrical Systems ▪ LT breakers ▪ DG Breakers ▪ Diesel Generators. (DG’s) ▪ Power Distribution Panel (PDU’s) ▪ Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS)

vi. Fire Protection systems

Dedicated Software level Protocol integrators for intelligent Third Party Systems: ▪ Fire Alarm System (FAS) ▪ High Sensitivity Smoke Detection System

The System shall present a Single Graphics Interface to the user for Control and monitoring of the above.



The system shall offer enhanced functionalities such as Alarms management, Maintenance management, Trending and logging of Data, along with Data Analysis. Consumption Patterns of the Building shall be presented in a Dashboard format for easy monitoring. The Seamless integration shall be made possible by either having a unified database of the various BAS Subsections, or via Middleware developed to interface the disparate databases and trigger handles. The System Design shall be preferably on the following Management Levels:

• Lowermost field instrumentation level

• Middle level of DDCs and Integrators for interfacing with disparate systems

• Upper Management level for Centralized control and monitoring

• Topmost level shall be the “intelligence” level for enabling the IBMS System to interpret and process raw data to “Intelligent Information”. The system design shall utilize the latest technology in “open” network architecture, in the following order of preference: 1) BacNet over IP (BTIL Approved) / Modbus. 2) Lon works certified Controllers with Echelon Compliant Topology, 3) Native BacNet MSTP (BTIL Approved). The BMS system offered should be from the latest offering of the BMS Product Line, and should be a freely programmable management and automation system for the full spectrum of today’s building application services. The BMS system shall meet the Tender Specification Document herewith, The facility shall also have an SMS & Email alarm notification device as a part of the Building Management System intended to be installed in the Premises. Also the BMS system shall control and monitoring from colour graphics pages on the remote web browser. The System shall mainly comprise of Direct Digital Controllers, Protocol Integrators, Web Server Ethernet routers, and relevant field level instrumentation. The BMS shall monitoring such as Precision Air Conditioning, Automatic Transfer Switch, Uninterrupted Power Supply, Electrical Breakers, Multifunction Load Managers, Fire Alarm, various Fire Fighting Systems. Any survey, inspection, design, submissions, supply, installation, transport, delivery, lifting, coordination, liaison with relevant parties, testing, commissioning, and provision of all labour, materials, equipment, etc to complete the work is part of contractor’s scope. The work shall include all minor and incidental it BMS necessary for the proper functioning of the complete system, even though not specifically detailed or mentioned. CODES AND STANDARDS The system shall have proper listing and/or approval from the following nationally recognized agencies: UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc FM Factory Mutual PRODUCT / MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS



This section defines the Basic Materials and Methods used in the installation of Digital Control products to provide the functions necessary for control of the systems on this project.

i.Provide a Facility Management and Control System incorporating a open Protocol, Direct Digital Control, equipment monitoring, and control consisting of microprocessor based plant control processors interfacing directly with sensors, actuators, and environmental delivery systems (ie. Electrical/HVAC units); electric controls and mechanical devices for all items.

ii.It is a requirement that all Controllers and Unitary Controllers utilize a protocol which can communicate within the site wide integrated system. All parties proposing control products shall liaise to ensure that these products are able to integrate with the existing system utilizing one of the following preferred protocols: • Lon Works compliant (note, only Standard Network Variable Types shall be used) • BacNet compliant (note, native BacNet unit shall be used) • OPC compliant. The contractor/installer (as applicable) shall confirm compliance with this requirement at the time of tender and prior to commencement of any works.

iii.The system installed shall seamlessly connect devices throughout the building regardless of subsystem type, i.e. Electrical breakers, HVAC, lighting, and security devices should easily coexists on the same network channel without the need for communications, configuration, time scheduling, alarm handling, history logging, and custom programming.

iv.The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection, point alarm association. Graphics software shall permit the importing of CAD symbol, or scanned pictures for use in the system.

v.A fully graphic management level featuring ergonomic images must be available. The system must be designed for operation, monitoring, optimization, and logging of all connected automation stations in real-time

vi.The displayed graphic symbols must correspond to the generally valid standard for HVAC symbols (DIN 19227) and ASHRAE guidelines. Symbols must be supported as two or three dimensional graphics. Capability to create color graphic floor plan displays and system schematics.

vii.Operating messages must be able to be displayed and evaluated at the management level. Graphics shall be capable of displaying the status of points that have been overridden by a local priority switch, for points that have been designed to provide a field local priority override capability.

viii. The control system shall be able to accommodate multiple user operation. Access to the control system data should be limited only by operator(Admin) password. Multiple users shall have access to all valid system data.

ix.User shall be able to add/delete/modify system graphics and state text for digital points, from standard user interface without the need of any external or specialized tools



x.The navigation through various graphic screens shall be optionally achieved through a hierarchical “tree” structure. Graphics viewing shall also include dynamic pan zoom capabilities and include the ability to switch between multiple layers with different information on each layer.

xi.As such, in the event of a network communication failure, or the loss of any other controller on the Network, the control system shall continue to independently operate under control of the resident time clock in each controller and the resident program stored in non-volatile memory as detailed herein. In such a case, each individual controller shall continue to trend data commensurate with the data storage capabilities of each controller until a network connection can be restored.

xii.The documentation contained in this section and other contract documents is schematic in nature. The Contractor shall provide hardware and software necessary to implement the functions shown or as implied in the contract documents.

xiii. System configuration and monitoring shall be performed via a PC-type computer. Under no circumstances shall the PC be used as a control device for the network. It can be used for storage of data.

xiv.Existing equipment/Components not supplied by the primary manufacturer shall be integrated to share common software for network communications, time scheduling, alarm handling, and history logging.

xv.All Controllers supplied and installed by the Contractor shall connect and communicate directly via the clients IT Ethernet network, not via a proprietary/ dedicated HVAC controls network. Where any interface device is required to allow a controller to connect to the Ethernet network, full detail and cost relating to this device shall be included. As a minimum, all Controllers shall comply with the following: 1. Shall be fully configurable in terms of IP address, subnet mask and default gateway settings. 2. Shall have a fixed MAC address 3. Shall be fully TCP/IP compliant 4. Shall use a standard UTP or Fibre Optic connector 5. Shall connect to an Ethernet LAN at 100 or 1000 Mb 6. If multiple speed, shall support auto sensing for both speed and duplex settings.

xvi.Providing a calendar type format for simplification of time and date scheduling and overrides of building operations is requested. Schedule definitions must reside in the PC workstation and in the Building Controller to ensure time equipment scheduling when PC is off-line. Provide override access through menu selection, graphical mouse action or function key. Provide the following capabilities as a minimum:

• Fully support all BACnet Schedule, Calendar, and Command objects.

• Daily and Weekly schedules

• Ability to combine multiple points into a logical Command Groups for ease of scheduling (e.g., Building 1 lights)

• Schedule predefined reports.

• Ability to schedule for a minimum of up to ten (10) years in advance.

• Provide filtering capabilities of schedules, based on name, time, frequency, and schedule.

• Provide sorting capabilities of schedules, based on name, time and type of schedule.



xvii.Controllers shall be complete with power supplies, a real-time clock, input and output modules, memory, processors and all other items necessary for proper and correct interfacing and operation of the control functions described in this document. All controllers shall have peer to peer communications. All controllers shall have a standalone capability such that a failure of networked system servers shall still permit the plant and controls associated with the controllers, to continue to operate normally with the controllers continuing to communicate with one another.

xviii.In the event of transmission failure in the system network the controllers shall continue to operate with all sequence interlocks and control strategies operating normally accepting those which require global information. Either user adjustable default values or the last sensed value (user selectable) shall then be assumed for these global parameters. Controllers shall be able to provide to/receive from the integrated system status information concerning their internal operations. This information shall include, but not be limited to: i. Data transmission and verification. ii. Input/output point status (i.e. sensor fault, point forced, etc). iii. Program status (i.e. program error, program running, etc). iv. Internal battery condition. All necessary interfacing equipment shall be provided so that the controllers are fully compatible with all items of plant and equipment.

xix.Each controller or controller location shall be provided with spare hardware capacity for future additions of at least 5% of each type of point. Universal inputs may be counted as either a spare digital or analogue point, but not both. Note that this spare capacity may be accomplished by the addition of input/output modules. Memory shall also be sufficient to allow all programs associated with these points to be run in the controller.

xx.The controllers shall be provided with their own internal battery backup power supply, capable of maintaining all memory including the real-time clock for not less than 72 hours. The battery shall be easily replaceable i.e. not soldered to the PCB.

xxi.The controllers shall be constructed so that the cabinets and internal terminal strips can be mounted, and electrical terminations made, with all electronics being added at a later date during the testing and commissioning phases.

xxii. History data logging and alarm detection shall be attained from all controllers in the network, including third party devices from alternate manufacturers. This data shall be monitored in the Graphic User Interface software.

xxiii.All microprocessor based controllers and unitary controllers must be capable of withstanding transient disturbances from the input power supply. Suppressors shall be fitted to all controller input and output points for protection against voltage transients, spikes etc. The controller’s communication network(s) shall be isolated against transient disturbances via optical couplers or other approved means.

xxiv. The equipment supplied shall be suitable for operation on site power supply and the supply voltage and frequency tolerances permitted by the Electricity Supply (Amendments No. 2) Regulations 1994 and the Electricity Board Regulations.

xxv.Multiple users must be able to work concurrently on various workspaces on the building automation and control system for efficient and comprehensive work. Plants must simultaneously be analyzed and e.g. monitored or operated via a remote station.



Multiuser-System with online services

Create calendar online

Calendar programs must be able to be remotely created online to provide service personnel a high level of flexibility. Create scheduler online

Scheduler programs must be able to be remotely created online to provide service personnel a high level of flexibility. Online creation of offline trends

Trends, that also trend offline, must be able to be remotely created online to provide service personnel a high level of flexibility. Multiple, concurrent users

Multiple users must be able to work concurrently on various workspaces on the building automation and control system for efficient and comprehensive work. Plants must simultaneously be analyzed and e.g. monitored or operated via a remote station. Security

Access protection

Different persons maintain and operate the plant. For this reason, passwords must be assigned to authorized persons to guarantee transparency for tracking or authorization purposes. A minimum of four different rights must be assignable.

• Administrator

• Program and graphics creation

• Operation to change or adjust set points

• Guest Windows authentication

The building automation and control system's password administration must be consistent with the customer's IT guidelines. In other words, corporate customer guidelines must also apply to the building automation and control system. As a result, password administration and related properties must be equal to standard Windows login and shall "follow" the operator to any workstation logged onto. Alarm handling Alarm generation

Message handling

Both types of alarm management (Intrinsic Reporting/Algorithmic Reporting) are supported as recipients. Alarms from automation stations are received at the management level, but not generated based on a change to Present Value or Status Flags in the automation station. All alarms are displayed when the management level is started.



• Intrinsic: Each BACnet object is alarmable.

• Algorithmic: Limit value supervision. Alarm routing

Media, independence, formats

Current alarms may need to be routed independent of media at certain times to a central service (Printer, email). To do this, various formats must be available (CSV, XLS, PDF). There shall be no limit to the number of points that can be configured for remote notification of alarm conditions and no limit on the number of remote devices which can receive messages from the system Alarm message escalation list

System must be configurable to send messages to an individual person or group of people and shall be configurable to send different messages to different remote devices based on alarm message priority level.It must be able to send also to an escalation list so that if the first device does not respond, the message is sent on to a second device after a configurable time has elapsed. Acknowledgment

Operator units for acknowledgement

After user rights are assigned, all alarms (alarms and faults, errors) must be acknowledgeable from all operator units. This helps to trace alarms. A time stamp and assignment (based on user account) is required. This includes:

• Local acknowledgement (control panel, automation station).

• Management level.

• Remote operating equipment. Alarm management strategy

The software shall allow the user to configure the alarm management strategy for each point. The editor shall provide the ability for editing the point database directly online with the Building Controllers. The operator interface software shall also provide the capability to perform bulk modification of point definition attributes to a single or multiple user-selected points. Alarm display

Color display

Incoming alarms must be colored for quick and easy interpretation. Both order and state as well as alarm priority must be recognizable. The alarm window must be displayed as per operator needs. Alarm window displays must be added to the bid. Alarm message content

The message texts must contain all information necessary to allocate and resolve the error. This includes at least the following attributes:

• Clear text.

• Control panel name

• Plant name



• Priority (min. 16 different priorities).

• Time.

• Status (acknowledged, unacknowledged).

• Instructions on how to resolve the problem must be available in the background. Filter alarms

The building automation and control system must offer alarm filtering. Filtering must be possible by alarm lists or priorities. Alarms are displayed in popup windows. Step-by-step instructions on handling each alarm help the building automation and control system operator to find a solution. Event management

Event Routing and sorting

Event Routing shall allow the user to send event notification to selected printers or workstation location(s) based on event severity, or point type. The List must have the ability to list and sort the events based on event status, point name, ascending or descending activation time.

Event Notification

Event Notification shall be presented to each workstation in a tabular format application, and shall include the following information for each event: name, value, event time and date, event status, priority, acknowledgement information, and alarm count. Each event shall have the ability to sound an audible notification based on the category of the event.

Event acknowledge

Directly from the Event List, the user shall have the ability to acknowledge, silence the event sound, print, or erase each event. The interface shall also have the option to inhibit the erasing of active acknowledged events, until they have returned to normal status. The user shall also have the ability to navigate to all information related to a selected point in order to command, launch an associated graphic or trended graphical plot, or run a report on a selected point directly from the Event List.

Report generation Reports

Report generation

The system must spontaneously (snapshot) generate predefined reports (real-time and historical data) to provide vital plant data at any time. These reports must be printable or exported to third-party spreadsheet software and as PDF file. The data must be editable in other programs (Microsoft Excel, or Microsoft Access) for further analysis. Standard report templates

Templates help generate comprehensive reports without much effort. At least three different report templates must be available.

• Reports to record alarm and fault states.

• Reports to record logbook entries.



• Reports to record plant and building panels states

• List of all points currently in override status

• List of all disabled points

• List of alarm strategy definitions

• Point totalization report

• Point Trend data listings

• Initial Values report

• User activity report

• Event history reports Customized report templates

The system must allow for creating specific report templates to meet individual report generation requirements, which also may include plant and trend graphics. Remote operation Operating options

General requirement for operating

The Web based interface shall provide the same functionalities as those available at any other workstation, including operation and configuration capabilities. All operator interface functions must be available in clients running in a browser, installed client console, or Windows desktop app. Via web browser

Users must be able to remotely operate and engineer plants regardless of location with the same user interface. This openness, of course, may in no way impact plant safety. The client must run in a browser as a Full Trust client application Dedicated Desktop Installed client

Users must be able to remotely operate and engineer plants regardless of location. This openness, of course, may in now way impact plant safety. The client must run as a fully installed software installation that can lockdown desktop space and prevent the ability for the software to be minimized or covered by other applications. Windows Desktop APP

Users must be able to remotely operate and engineer plants regardless of location with the same user interface. This openness, of course, may in no way impact plant safety. An app must be downloaded to the client from the server PC, that runs like an installed application, and must be automatically updated whenever new apps are available at the server. Trend data Analyses

Simultaneous, multiple trends

Multiple trend views must be possible simultaneously to provide a comprehensive plant overview. Standard plants from medium to higher complexity (as in this project) require a



simultaneous display of up to 10 trend curves on the current page view to assess the plants. Multiple trend curves must thus be recorded at the same time. Freely assign trend data

For greatest possible flexibility, operators must be able to assign and thus record max. 4 additional data points individually for each plant. The assignment must be carried out from the management station. Decentralized data storage

None of the trend data may be lost during communications failure to achieve gap-free trend documentation. For this reason, all trend data must be created and saved to the automation station. After communications are restored, all values saved on the management station must be updated automatically. Record history data, trend

Vital data points and setpoints must be saved for each building services plant. The polling time is oriented to the signal type, i.e. analog values are recorded cyclically while digital or multistate values are recorded by event. Intermediate storage of history data

Trend data are collected in the automation station and transferred to the management level after a specific time has expired or specific number of data has been recorded. Trend data may not be lost if the management station is unavailable temporarily. Trend comparison

To make analysis of changed conditions in different times, the system must provide a time shifted trend view. Design for use with fire life safety systems (UL certified)

• The management station shall have passed performance and environmental tests by the Underwriters Laboratories (UL). To combine the comfort and fire life safety system, the management station shall provide all the relevant functions:

• Visualize and treat events

• Graphically monitor and control the life safety system

• Know where to start as highest priority events are highlighted.

• Directly navigate to the triggering element of an event.

• Quickly navigate to custom operator instructions and graphical display of event locations.

• Store and retrieve fire alarm system activity data.

• Distribute fire monitoring and control capabilities across the network of the management stations.

• Provide Operating Procedure checklists to guide the operator, under stress conditions, during the treatment of life safety events.

• Send out automatic remote notification of responders through email.

• View and schedule automatic history reports. SERVERS & CENTRAL OPERATOR’s WORKSTATION



General Requirements Desktop Computer Software System The System shall comprise of the following minimum hardware: System Configuration : INTEL CORE I7 or latest processor with minimum 12 GB DDR RAM , minimum 1TB SATA Hard Disk, DVD R/W, Lan Card 10/100/1000 base-T, Multi Monitor Support, Optical Mouse, 104 Keys Keyboard, latest windows OS compatible with BMS Software, high quality media graphics card, MS Office with Antivirus software. DDC CONTROL UNIT At the heart of the DDC system shall be the Microprocessor based modules, which can be individually programmed according to the functional requirements. All DDCs must be UL approved, must have real time clock and be suitable for PID control.

• Inbuilt real time clock (time stamping from external devices are not acceptable) with a battery backup for a minimum of 10 years.

• Based on BACnet ANSI ASHRAE 135-2008(BACNet)

• Freely Programmable

• Universal inputs, which can be connected to passive (Ni 1000) and active (DC 0…10 V) sensor elements, or to binary volt-free contacts, for signaling functions.

• Flash ROM, real time processing and multi tasking

• 32 bit processor system

• Supply voltage AC 24V +/-20% 50/60 Hz

• Historical data memory storage

• Event driven data transmission

• Software application stored in non volatile memory

• Built in LED Status display for Digital Outputs(Green LED) Functions to include

• Process control & interlock functions.

• Alarm transmission via SMS and e-mail

• Operation of all time schedules, exception calendar and heating curves.

• Reading of trend data with facility to export data to Microsoft Excel

• Multi user level access protection

• Ethernet or Modem connection

• Runtime tantalization

• Energy calculations

• Trend logging of specific data-points The programming tool shall be a windows based for convenience. ROUTERS, BRIDGES, REPEATERS AND TRANSCEIVERS 1. Equip each router and bridge with a network transceiver on each network port (inbound and outbound) as dictated by the network type 2. The network router shall be designed to route messages from a segment, sub-net, or domain in full duplex communication mode.



3. Routers and bridges shall utilize protocol transport, network, session layers to transparently route messages bound for a node address in another sub-net or domain. 4. Routers, bridges and repeaters shall be fully programmable and permit a systems integrator to define message traffic, destination, and other network management functions. 5. The routers, bridges, and repeaters shall be capable of DIN rail or panel mounting and be equipped with status LED lights for Network traffic and power. Transceivers: Type 1 Network Transceiver, Free Topology, and Twisted Pair: Provide a transformer isolated, twisted pair transceiver capable of mounting directly on a printed circuit board. The transceiver shall meet the following specifications: • Differential Manchester encoded signalling for polarity insensitive network wiring. • Transformer isolated for common mode rejection. • 78kbs network bit rate up to distances of 2000m. ELECTRONIC INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES 1. Room Temperature Sensor:

Sensing Element : Pt1000 Range of Use : 0...50 °C Degree of protection : IP 30 to IEC 529 Output Signal : Resistive Output Environmental conditions Temperature : 0...50 °C Humidity : <85 % r. h. 2. Room Temperature & RH Sensor: Sensing Element : NTC 10k(Temperature), capacitive sensing element(Humidity) Range of Use : 0...50 °C/ − 35...+ 35 °C / − 40…+70 °C (Temperature), 0…100 % r.h Degree of protection : IP 30 as per IEC 60529 Output Signal : DC 0...10 V for both(Temperature and Humidity) Power supply : AC 24 V ± 20 %, 50/60 Hz Accuracy : ± 0.8 K(15...35 °C), ± 3 % r.h (30...70 % r.h) Approval : CE, UL 873,C-Tick Environmental conditions Temperature : -15...50 °C Humidity : <95 % r. h. 3. Duct Temperature Sensor: Sensing Element : Pt1000 Range of Use : − 50...+ 80 °C Degree of protection : IP 42 to IEC 529 Output Signal : Resistive Output Probe Length : 400mm Environmental conditions Temperature : – 40...+ 70 °C



Humidity : 5...95 % r. h. 4. Duct Temperature & RH Sensor: Sensing Element : NTC 10k(Temperature), capacitive sensing element(Humidity) Range of Use : 0...50 °C/ − 35...+ 35 °C / − 40…+70 °C (Temperature), 0…100 % r.h Degree of protection : IP 54 as per IEC 60 529 Output Signal : DC 0...10 V for both(Temperature and Humidity) Power supply : AC 24 V ± 20 %, 50/60 Hz Accuracy : ± 0.8 K(15...35 °C), ± 3 % r.h (30...70 % r.h) Approval : CE, UL 873,C-Tick Environmental conditions Temperature : -25...70 °C Humidity : <95 % r. h. 5. Duct Differential Pressure Sensor(Air) Sensing Element : Piezo-resistive Range of Use : 0...200 Pa/ 0...250 Pa/ 0…500 Pa Degree of protection : IP 42 as per IEC 60 529 Power supply : AC 24 V ± 15 %, 50/60 Hz Output Signal : DC 0...10 V Accuracy : < ± 0.1 % FS / °C( at 20°Ambient, TC zero point) Overload Pressure : 5,000 Pa Medium temperature : 0...70 °C Pressure connection : PVC nipples ∅ 6.2 mm Approval : CE, C-Tick,ROHS Accessories : consisting of 2 m plastic tubes, 2 air duct probes Environmental conditions Temperature : -25...70 °C Humidity : <90 % r. h. (without condensation) 6. Room Differential Pressure Sensor(Air) Sensing Element : Piezo-resistive Range of Use : ±50 Pa/ ±100 Pa Degree of protection : IP 42 as per IEC 60 529 Output Signal : DC 0...10 V Power supply : AC 24 V ± 15 %, 50/60 Hz Accuracy : < ± 0.1 % FS / °C( at 20°Ambient, TC zero point) Overload Pressure : 5,000 Pa Medium temperature : 0...70 °C Pressure connection : PVC nipples ∅ 6.2 mm Approval : CE, C-Tick,ROHS Accessories : consisting of 2 m plastic tubes, 2 air duct probes Environmental conditions Temperature : -25...70 °C Humidity : <90 % r. h. (without condensation) 7. Damper Actuator (Fire Damper Actuator On/Off)



Type : Rotary version with spring return Operating voltage : AC 24 V ± 20 % 50 or 60 Hz IP Rating : IP54 Type of Signal : Two-position control Torque : 7NM (1.5SQM damper Area) or 18NM,(3SQM Damper Area) Runtime for rotary angle 90° : 90 s Closing time with return spring : 15 s Manual Override : YES Round / square shaft: 6.4...20.5 / 6.4...13 mm (7NM) Round / square shaft: 8...25.6 / 6...18 mm (18NM) Approval : CE,C-Tick Environmental conditions Temperature : –32…+70 °C Humidity : <95 % r.h HARDWARE IDENTIFICATION A. Wire Tags 1. All multi-conductor cables in all pull boxes and terminal strip cabinets shall be tagged. 2. Provide wire Tags as per Division 16. B. Conduit Tags 1. Provide tagging or labelling of conduit so that it is always readily observable which conduit was installed or used in implementation of this Work. C. Miscellaneous Equipment Identification 1. Screwed-on, engraved black lamicoid sheet with white lettering on all control panels and remote processing panels. Lettering sizes subject to approval. 2. Inscription, subject to review and acceptance, indicating equipment, system numbers, functions and switches. For panel interior wiring, input/output modules, local control panel device identification. Further to the above technical specification laid down in the Tender, the BMS Vendor shall also satisfy following technical requirements and scope of works:-

• Design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of all hardware, software, controls wiring, containment, conduiting, truncking and power to the equipment from Isolators provided under the Electrical Contract.

• Supply and Install wall/duct temperature and humidity sensors, tank level sensors. Supply liquid differential pressure switches and actuators for installation by the BMS Contractor.

• Transportation, off-loading, craneage and moving into position of all of the above.

• Include for travel and accommodation for three people for factory witness testing.

• Commission the complete system on site to an agreed programme. Handover to include IST testing following completed commissioning of all works.

• Include for services visits at 3 months after commissioning.



• Warranty the Works for 24 months from date of issue of the Certificate of Practical Completion.

• 2 Set of details and drawings to be provided as defined in the Construction Instruction section of this Specification.

• 2 Set of Operating & Maintenance (O & M) documentation to be provided as defined in the Construction Instruction section.

• Include for closely liaising with the Fire Protection system Contractor, Mechanical and Electrical Works Contractors and all other associated Trade Contractors.

• A training section should be conducted to Instruct Employer’s Staff on operating and maintenance procedures.

• Should Provide critical spare parts list which shall be available till 10 years from date of successful handover..

• Prior to Practical Completion of the Project the Trade Contractor shall carry out a full clean of the works.

• The tenderer is to allow for enclosures to be painted in RAL or BS colours other than this standard. This is to allow for identification of systems. Up to 4 different colors may be required. Colors shall be advised at the time of ordering.

• The above works are described in more detail in subsequent Clauses and Schedules and as the accompanying Drawings. QUALITY ASSURANCE The Building Automation and Control System shall be furnished, engineered, and installed by Trained Engineers of the Contractor. The contractor shall have extensive knowledge and shall be factory certified. The contractor shall employ technicians who have completed the factory authorized training. The contractor shall employ technicians to provide instruction, routine maintenance, and emergency service within 24 hours upon receipt of request. DIGITAL RODENT REPELLENT SYSTEM DESIGN INTENT The rodent repellent system shall be installed on the entire floor in all voids. The objective is to keep the rodents away from the floor by generating very high frequency sound waves (above 20 kHz) which are not legible to human ear but irritates rodents. The objective is to



protect all the cables under floor, above ceiling & room void from damage caused by rodents.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Rodent Repellent system shall be provided in DC areas, UPS rooms, Electrical rooms, MMR areas, Staging rooms, Hub rooms & all shafts etc. The system proposed is Digital Rodent repellent system which shall have GUI software compatibility to display the status of all the transducers connected in the network. It shall also be capable to regulate the wave density, speed, with a combination of 45 such patterns. The system proposed is to protect all the equipment, areas with relevant type of high frequency sound producing device called satellites or transducers. All these transducers are connected in series or parallel to a main controller which provides power to these units. These satellites shall cover an area not less than 400 Sq.ft for ceiling void; room void & floor void applications. Once powered up these transducers produce very high frequency variable sound waves (above 20 Khz) continuously which irritate the rodents and are forced to evacuate the place. The frequency at which the transducers produce are illegible to human ear & doesn`t cause any harm and ensure below 1/3rd octave. The controller shall have LCD display & can cover area of about 10000 sqf. The controller shall have on board controls for wave speed, wave density, frequency band time etc. The System is proposed with backup power from UPS.

REFERENCE STANDARD Equipment manufacturer’s recommendations ·

SYSTEM COMPONENTS

SATELLITES: The satellites or Transducers shall be circular ceiling mounted low profile units that produce high decibel sound waves at very high frequency not less than 20 Khz. These satellites shall cover an area not less than 400 Sq. ft for Room void application, for ceiling Voids & floor void applications. These shall be powered thru Main Controller to 24 satellites in parallel. Each transducer covers an open area of 400 Sq feet where the average height of the ceiling is 12 feet. Even when installed in the false ceiling or false floorings it will cover an area of 400 sq. feet. The same is possible because of the transducer’s streaming effect design. Each transducer occupies a maximum space of 15 cubic inches and aesthetically



designed to match your décor. Being monopolar in nature. They can be installed in any sensitive area with zero risk of sparking. The transducers can withstand high temperatures in the false ceilings and low temperatures in cold storages and air locks. The transducers do not need a power connection. The transducers can be tested on an audible range independently, by selecting the Transducer testing menu from the LCD panel

CONTROLLER The controller shall support 24 Transducers and shall come with a pair of stands and brackets. The master Controller is installed in the main control / server room and the transducers in the problematic area i.e. above and below false ceiling and below false flooring. The master controller needs a power connection of 5A electrical plug point and comes equipped with a 3 pin power supply cord of 1.5 meters

Features:

• 9600 Sq Feet of Area Coverage per system/ Controller.

• Shall drive up to 24 Transducers. With minimum @ 400sft coverage each.

• LCD display with on-board controls for changing the following parameters.

• Wave Speed: Is an indicator for the number of frequency sweeps per minute. It can have a maximum value of 130 and a minimum value of 60. The incremental size is 5 i.e. 65, 70, 75 and so on.

• Wave Density: Is an indicator for the number of divisions within a frequency band. It can have a maximum value of 100 and a minimum value of 80. The incremental size is 10 i.e. 80, 90 and 100.

• Frequency Band Time: Is an indicator of the time for which the controller would operate in a pre programmed frequency band. There are 3 bands available: Band A, Band B, and Band C. This parameter can have maximum value of 10 minutes and a minimum value of 1 minute per band. Depending upon the time frame set for each band, the controller will switch the bands automatically.

• Machine/Controller ID: Is an indicator of the machine/controller identification number. It can have any value within the range of 1 to 255.

• Frequency Testing: This feature will enable the user to test and verify the frequency that is being transmitted from the controller to the transducer. This feature would be particularly useful during systems audit.

• Modbus output for BMS integration.

• Transducer Testing: All the 24 transducers can be tested in an audible range all at one go by using this feature.

• Provision for restoring all the parameters to the factory default setting

• Inbuilt RS/EIA-485 transmissions up to 1.2 kms to protected area.



• The transducer can cover up to 400 sq. feet of area above false ceiling, below false ceiling and below false flooring.

• Frequency band of > 20 KHz and <60 KHz is pre tuned for 100 different frequencies. CONTROLLER SPECIFICATIONs:

o Operating Frequency : Above 20 KHZ and below 60 Khz. o Sound output : 80db to 110db at 1metre.

o Power output : 1W per transducer. o Sweeps per Minute : 130(Configurable). o Frequency Division : 100(Configurable). o Power Consumption : 15 Watts Approximately

o Power Supply : 230V AC/ 50Hz 14 Volts DC o Dimensions : 225(W) x 100(H) x 270(D)mm o Weight : 6.5 Kgs Approx. o Mounting : Wall / Table Mounting

CABLES: 2 core flexible (14/40) SWG multistrand or 0.5 sq. mm single strand. CT wires for connectivity between the transducers and the controller. Specification:

S.NO DATA

1 No. of cores 2 nos.

2 Conductor Copper Tinned Multi Strand

3 No. Of Conductors 14 nos

4 Core Insulation PVC Insulation

5 Color of Core Insulation

Red, Black/Blue

6 Outer Sheath PVC

7 Color of Outer Sheath Light Grey

8 Voltage Rating 230 V

9 Conductor wire 0.5 sq mm

10 FRLS / Non FRLS Non FRLS

STANDS AND BRACKETS:

Power coated Aluminum accessory for mounting of the master controller. INSTALLATION: Installation shall be as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the major



equipment manufacturer. All cables, junction boxes, cables supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Transducers shall not be installed prior to the system programming and test period. If construction is ongoing during this period, measures shall be taken to protect transducers from contamination and physical damage. All transducers and control panels shall be flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas. Installation of Transducers All Transducers shall be installed in accordance with installation instructions provided by the manufacturer. All Transducers shall be installed in the exact locations specified in the design drawings; thus providing the best possible protection. All Transducers shall be securely fixed to approved boxes and allow for easy fitting and removal of Transducers. Cable and wire entries to Transducers shall be fitted with grommets to prevent possible damage to the insulation. Cable and wire strain relief clamps shall be provided at all entries to Transducers. Installation of Controllers The Main Console shall be installed in accordance with installation instructions provided by the manufacturer. The Main Console and its associated component parts shall be installed in the location specified in the design drawings. The Main Console equipment shall be securely fixed, and if required, marked with appropriate notices, warnings, signs as applicable. Cable and wire entries to the Main Console and associated devices shall be fitted with grommets or glands to prevent possible damage to the insulation. Cable and wire strain relief clamps shall be provided at entries to Main Console and associated devices as required. TESTING

Sr No

Description Visual Test Readings Documentation



1 All cables are tested for continuity, insulation, resistance etc.

√

2

System installation proper as per drawing Carry out visual checks on all satellites & consoles free from any mechanical damage, cables, interface modules etc. to ensure they are

√

3 properly installed. √

4 Check for proper termination & feruling

√

5 Check Input A/C Supply Voltage

√

6 Check location/spacing of satellites as in drawing.

√ √

7 Check Distribution of satellites / Zones as per Drawing.

√ √

8 In Test mode check for each transducer generating sound.

√

9 Check Frequency output from panel should be min 20KHZ

√ √

10 If power fails, whether panel working on battery supply

√

11 Panel display and all key working properly

√

12

Check if supply is being provided to the Transducers from the main controller

√ √

COMMISSIONING: At final commissioning of each system, the Contractor shall confirm that: All detection devices, main console are tested and operate correctly. The standby batteries are adequately sized. (Measurements of the quiescent and alarm loads shall be taken and compared to calculated values used at the design stage.) Calculations and measurements shall be submitted to the Engineer. Commissioning shall be fully documented and the documentation submitted to the Engineer. The Contractor shall demonstrate each zone and main console to the satisfaction of the



Engineer by conducting a series of witnessed acceptance tests as directed by the Engineer. This shall take place after the above final commissioning and following receipt of the commissioning documentation by the Engineer of all devices in the system, simulation of various faults and operation of all manual controls. Both the installation and the commissioning activities shall be undertaken as a single continuous operation. Upon completion of the installation activity, the Rodent System contractor shall Test, Start-up, Commission and Handover the system to the customer. The Rodent System contractor shall make use of the following documents to record test results and details of commissioning tests: Cable Test Sheets Installation Check Report System Layout Drawing(s) System Schematic Diagram(s) The Rodent System contractor shall be responsible for inspecting and testing the complete system. The Rodent System contractor shall present an Acceptance Certificate for signature by the Consultant/Customer. TRAINING: General The contractor shall provide the customer with details of the training required by personnel to operate and maintain the Rodent Repellent System. The Contractor and the customer shall jointly agree the number of staff to attend the training courses. MAINTENANCE: Routine maintenance should be carried out in accordance with relevant customers’ requirements. All performance checks undertaken should be recorded in the system log book. As a minimum, the following performance checks must be undertaken on each maintenance visit. Carry out verification checks as detailed in the commissioning instructions. Remove dust and dirt from the Control Panels/satellites using a soft brush or a lint cloth. A solvent which is harmless to the finishes of metal and plastic may be applied to more stubborn stains. Examine the exterior of the enclosure for any signs of damage or loose cable glands and rectify any faults found. Examine the printed circuit boards for signs of overheating, dry joints and/or damaged tracks. Examine the battery terminals for secure connection and for any signs of corrosion. Replace or repair as required.



Maintenance frequency should be quarterly. Service support in warranty and AMC period should be 24x7x365 days. Software revision upgrade should be part of warranty and AMC scope.



HIGH SENSITIVITY SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM

DESCRIPTION IN GENERAL A high performance aspirating smoke detection system shall be supplied, installed and commissioned by the specialist contractor in accordance with the requirements detailed in the NFPA – 72, Aspirating Detection Systems. The system has been designed to sense incipient smoke at a very early stage in all critical rooms, namely:

1. Data Center (Server Rooms) 2. Electrical Room UPS, & Battery Room etc.

The panels shall be mounted inside the risk protected and there shall be a network of air sampling pipe work. The High Sensitivity Smoke detection consists of highly sensitive Laser-based Smoke Detectors with aspirators connected to networks of sampling pipes. The alarms are generated once the laser sensor receives smoke at a pre determined obscuration level to activate and alert, Fire 1, Fire 2 and alert signal. The signal is extended to the Fire Alarm monitor Modules / BMS through Volt free contacts for further investigation. When Required, it shall be possible to connect a interface card for open Protocol output to BMS system for online Monitoring with Software level integration. When required, an optional remote Display unit shall be provided to monitor each detector, and a Programmer shall be supplied to configure the system.

SCOPE OF WORK This specifications covers the requirements of design, supply of materials, installation, testing and commissioning of Aspirating Smoke Detection System. The system shall include all equipment’s, appliances and labour necessary to install the system, complete with highly sensitive LASER / LED- based Smoke Detectors with aspirators connected to network of sampling pipes. CODES AND STANDARDS The entire installation shall be installed to comply one or more of the following codes and standards : NFPA Standards, US British Standards, BS 5839 part :1 APPROVALS

All the equipments shall be tested, approved, and/or listed by : LPCB (LossPrevention Certification Board), UK FM Approved for hazardous locations Class 1,Div 2



UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.), US ULC (Underwriters Laboratories Canada), Canada Vds (Verband der Sachversicherer e.V), Germany

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

The System shall consist of a high sensitive LASER-based smoke detector, aspirator, and filter. It shall have a display featuring LEDs and Reset/Isolate button. The system shall be configured by a programmer that is either integral to the system, portable or PC based. The system shall allow programming of: a) Multiple Smoke Threshold Alarm Levels. b) Time Delays. c) Faults including airflow, detector, power, filter block and network as well as an

indication of the urgency of the fault.

d) Configurable relay outputs for remote indication of alarm and fault Conditions. It shall consist of an air sampling pipe network to transport air to the detection system, supported by calculations from a computer-based design modeling tool. Optional equipment may include intelligent remote displays and/or a high level interface with the building fire alarm system, or a dedicated System Management graphics package.

Performance Requirements a) Shall provide very early smoke detection though four smoke threshold alarm levels per pipe provide multiple output levels. These levels shall be programmable and shall be able to set sensitivities ranging from 0.025 – 20% obscuration / meter. b) Shall report any fault on the unit by using configurable fault output relays or via the graphics Software. c) Shall notify for filter contamination / blockage in holes. d) Shall incorporate a flow sensor in each pipe and provide staged airflow faults. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT’S Both Light Scattering and Particle Counting shall be utilized in the device as follows: The Laser detection Chamber shall be of the mass Light Scattering type and capable of detecting a wide range of smoke particle types of varying size. A particle counting method shall be employed for the purposes of



a) preventing large particles from affecting the true smoke reading.

b) Monitoring contamination of the filter (dust & dirt etc.) to notify automatically when maintenance is required.

The Laser Detection Chamber shall incorporate a separate secondary clean air feed from the filter; providing clean air barriers across critical detector optics to eliminate internal detector contamination. The detector shall not use adaptive algorithms to adjust the sensitivity from the set during commissioning. A learning tool shall be provided to ensure the best selection of appropriate alarm thresholds during the commissioning process. DETECTOR ASSEMBLY

The Detector, Filter, Aspirator and Relay Outputs shall be housed in a mounting box and shall be arranged in such a way that air is drawn continuously from the fire risk area by the Aspirator and a sample passed through the Dual Stage Filter and then to the detector. The detector shall be LASER-based and shall have an obscuration sensitivity range of 0.025 – 20% obs/m. The detector shall have four programmable smoke alarm thresholds across its sensitivity range with adjustable time delays for each threshold between 0 - 60 seconds. The detector shall also incorporate the facility to transmit a fault through a relay. The detector shall have a single pipe inlet that must contain an ultrasonic flow sensor. High flow fault (urgent and non-urgent) and low flow fault (urgent and non-urgent) can be reported. The filter must be a two-stage disposable filter cartridge. The first stage shall be capable of filtering particles in excess of 20 microns from the air sample. The second stage shall be ultra-fine, removing more than 99% of contaminant particles of 0.3 microns or larger, to provide a clean air barrier around the detector’s optics to prevent contamination and increase service life. The aspirator shall be a purpose-designed rotary vane air pump. It shall be capable of allowing/ supporting for a single pipe run / multiple sampling pipe runs with a transport time of less than 90 seconds. Detectors shall be capable of supporting a single pipe run of 25m with a maximum transport time of 120 seconds or as appropriate standards dictate. The Assembly must contain relays for fire 1, Action and fault conditions. The relays shall be software programmable (latching or non-latching). The relays must be rated at 2 A at 30V DC. Remote relays shall be offered as an option and either configured to replicate those on the detector or programmed differently. The Assembly shall have built-in event and smoke logging. It shall store smoke levels, alarm conditions, operator actions and faults. The date and time of each event shall be recorded. Each detector (Zone) shall be capable of storing up to 18000 events.



DISPLAYS ON THE DETECTOR ASSEMBLY

The detector will be provided with LED indicators.

Each Detector shall provide the following features at a minimum.

Alert, Alarm, Fire 1 and Fire 2 corresponding to the alarm thresholds of the detector.

Smoke Dial display represents the level of smoke present.

Fault Indicator.

Disabled indicator.

Buttons supporting the following features shall be accessible to authorized personnel.

Reset – Unlatches all latched alarm and faults.

Disable – Disables the fire relay outputs from actuating and indicates a fault.

SAMPLING PIPE The sampling pipe shall be smooth bore with an outside diameter of 25mm and internal diameter of 21mm should be used. The pipe material should be suitable for the environment in which it is installed, or should be the material as required by the specifying body. All joints in the sampling pipe must be air tight and made by using solvent cement, except at entry to the detector. The pipe shall be identified as Aspirating Smoke Detector Pipe along its entire length at regular intervals not exceeding the manufacturer’s recommendation or that of local codes and standards. All pipes should be supported at not less than 1.5m centres, or that of the local codes or standards. The far end of each trunk or branch pipe shall be fitted an end cap and drilled with a hole appropriately sized to achieve the performance as specified and as calculated by the system design. SAMPLING HOLES Sampling Holes of 2mm, or otherwise appropriately sized holes, shall not be separated by more than the maximum distance allowable for conventional detectors as specified in the local codes & standards. Intervals may vary according to calculations. Each sampling point shall be identified in accordance with Codes or Standards.



Consideration shall be given to the manufacturer’s recommendations and standards in relation to the number of Sampling Points and the distance of the Sampling Points from the ceiling and roof structure and forced ventilation systems. INSTALLATION The Contractor shall install the system in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation. Where false ceilings are available, the sampling pipe shall be installed above the ceiling, and Capillary Sampling Points shall be installed on the ceiling and connected by means of a capillary tube. The minimum internal diameter of the Capillary tube shall be 5mm, the maximum length of the capillary tube shall be 2m unless the manufacturer in consultation with the engineer have specified otherwise. The Capillary tube shall terminate at a ceiling Sampling Point specifically approved by the Client. The performance characteristics of the sampling points shall be taken into account during the system design. Air Sampling Piping network shall be laid as per the approved pipe layout. Pipe work calculations shall be submitted with the proposed pipe layout design for approval. Testing Commissioning Test Commissioning of the entire installation shall be done in the presence of the owner and/or its representative. All necessary instrumentation, equipment, materials and labour shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall record all tests and system calibrations and a copy of these results shall be retained on site in the system Log Book. Functional Test Introduce Smoke into the Detector Assembly to provide a basic functional test. Introduce smoke to the least favorable Sampling Point in each Sampling Pipe. Transport time is not to exceed 120 Sec’s. Documentation The bidder shall be authorized and trained by the manufacturer to design, install, test and maintain the Aspiration Smoke Detection system and shall be able to produce a certificate issued by the manufacturer along with the offer. The bidder shall submit computer generated software calculations for design of aspirating pipe network, on award of the contract. Product data and performance criteria shall be submitted by the bidder.



The bidder should provide, as part of handing over, the as-built drawing, operation manual and maintenance manual. The as-built drawing shall exactly match the Sampling pipe layout with the aspire pipe software calculation.



DIGITAL WATER LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM GENERAL DESCRIPTION Water Leakage system is already in place in both Data Centre floors from different OEM. The system shall be based on linear sensing cables, connected to a SIM (Sensor Interface Module) unit, allowing the localization of any abnormal presence of liquids such as water & slightly corrosive & conductive liquids to the nearest metre. Each Floor SIM Shall be connected master panel in the BMS Room at 2nd /3Rd Floor. The Master Panel shall be able to manage information of all leaks relating to the number of Modules installed. (E.g. 100 Modules installed, 100 leaks displayed). Each SIM shall be Connected with maximum 200 mtr of sensing cable length. LCD display Supervising Panel Such Panel shall have a LCD display (4 lines X 20 characters) with backlight and a 90dB max. buzzer with silencing button. It shall also have LEDs indicating “POWER” (green), “LEAK” (red) and “TROUBLE” (red). (ie: “TROUBLE” means either cable break or power failure). The System shall sound an audible alarm upon detecting a “LEAK” and/or “TROUBLE”. If there is a cable break at any point along the sensing cable, the sensing cable length still in connection to the control units shall continue to function and detect leak (if any). This Fail-Safe Loop Back feature (Class A wiring) shall be incorporated as necessity to enhance the system capability. Once the alarm condition has been cleared, the System shall be capable to reset itself automatically. The water leak system comprises of a water leak Master panel, Supervisory Panel, sensor interface module & sensor cable. The water leak panels are located in respective Data Centre floors and all alarms is needed to be extended in both the floors as required and the system shall have ample provision for this. This specification shall be the guideline for testing and commissioning complete water leak detection system for integration with BMS. Testing procedure shall involve physical application of a wet cloth to the cable, to test the relay operation. The Panel should sound the Alarms, and notify the BMS system. CODES AND STANDARDS As per relevant and applicable standards and OEMs’ recommendations PRODUCT / MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS Sense Cables The Water leak detection sensor cable typically used to detect liquids such as water & slightly corrosive & conductive liquids in critical rooms to monitor leakage and optionally extend alarm in the premises to close water supply to the CRAC by controlling in the solenoid valve. As the integration is required for both the Data Centre floor as well as with BMS system If required sense cable for this purpose. The sense cable shall consist of a central core (data bus) on which 4 wires shall be spiralled to ensure detection.



The sense cable, shall be available in various lengths, and shall be connected via the male and female connectors to make it intelligent and to digitally communicate with the digital Supervisory unit. The sensing cable shall detect the presence of water and other slightly corrosive & conductive fluids. The cable shall consist of four wires: two sensor wires, a continuity wire, and a return wire. The cable shall be available in modular lengths with factory installed male/female quick connect-type connectors. The cable shall be capable of branching, jumpering, and zoning. Each sense cable shall perform following functions: • Locate and Detect liquid leaks to the nearest metre. • Detect a cut or break in the cable (cable break) • Communicate all the information to the Master panel & Supervisory Panel • Simultaneous leaks at multiple locations shall be generated. • The sense cable will be inflammable and fixed using holds down clips. • Each sense cable shall transmit information on the type of defect: leak, located to the nearest metre with the date and time of the fault. Network Master Panel & Supervisory Panel The Network master panel & Supervisory Panel shall receive the data processed and transmitted by the digital sense cables. The Network master & Supervisory Panel shall be able to manage up to 100 Modules and shall receive 100 simultaneous pieces of information. These panels should be capable of monitoring 20,000 m of sensing cable. The Network Master Panel & Supervisory Panel shall be capable of monitoring up to 100 sensor interface modules, each with any combination of up to 200 m of sensing cable or sensing probes. The panel shall continue to monitor all of the systems even after detecting and locating a leak or service event. The system shall re-alarm on movement of the first event or upon detection of subsequent events, and shall incorporate a history log of all system events. The panel shall provide cable diagnostics to indicate if maintenance on the sensor cables is required. The panel shall provide full system diagnostics on the detection and measurement circuitry. The Network Master module shall continuously monitor the leak detection system for sensor integrity. The panel shall not require any operator programming and shall be capable of automatically calibrating the entire system including components when power is supplied. Locator modules requiring programming for leak detection and location are not acceptable. The Network Master Panel shall be powered by 230VAC necessary power converter /rectifier as required shall also be provided. The module shall provide independent volt-free Form C (SPDT) relay contacts to signal leak detection, sensor service required, and system trouble. The Network Master panel shall interface with building management system through standard protocol (Modbus IP/ BacNet IP). All leak detection system status details shall be available through the communication interface. Each Module shall have its own identity or address, which can be set up directly by the installer or the end user. The Master panel will post the various faults appearing on the sense cables while specifying:



a) The name of the Module and where the fault has appeared, the name of the room, or level. b) The type of fault, leak located to nearest metre or cable break. c) The date and time the fault appeared. The Panel shall have an Event History Minimum 896 Events. The Master Module shall be provided, either in a wall mounted, or rack mounted versions. Sensor Interface Module (SIM) : All SIM’s to have a Sensitivity adjustment which can be done easily control at site to sense different amount of liquid at site and to meet various requirements. Failed-Safe Loop Back The entire system shall be able to connect as a Failed Safe Loop Back configuration. Thus, during any cable break point (especially at start point of sensor), the system is still able to perform and activate an alarm for liquid leakage. Jumper Cable Connection and Accessories: The cable shall be suitable for use to connect between the sensor module and the sensing cable jumper cable shall be used for the connections. Warning Labels shall be placed on the sense cable approximately every three metres. All wire and cable shall be ISI approved. Modular Leader Cable: Modular Leader cable shall be a minimum 3 mtrs connection cable with one end prepared for connection to terminals in Master panel/ module, and with socket-type plastic connector at other end to connect to the sensor cable / jumper cable. Modular End Termination: The termination shall have pin-type plastic connector at end of sensing circuit and ends of all branches. Modular Branch Connector: The connector shall be suitable for use to allow a “T” or branch in the sensing circuit. The connector shall be pin-type plastic connector to connect to cable from alarm module, two socket-type plastic connectors to connect branches. Tag: High-visibility yellow tags shall be used to identify sensing cable and record mapped distance, containing a permanent marker. Tag shall attach to sensing cable by closing on itself, the contractor shall Use a tag on each length of cable and at mapping points Hold-down clip: Hold-down clips shall be used to attach sensing cables to flat surfaces. Communication Configuration: The master Panel & Supervisory Panel shall be equipped with appropriate but not less than two dry contacts to be activated in the event of leak, cable break.



ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM & DETECTION SYSTEM The Fire Alarm System supplier shall furnish and install a fully integrated Fire Detection & alarm system for the area. Wherein all the sensors, modules, devices are too installed in all areas and voids to cover the entire premises. This section of the specification includes the furnishing, installation, and connection of a microprocessor controlled, analog addressable, intelligent fire alarm equipment required to form a complete coordinated system ready for operation. It shall include, but not be limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, control panels, auxiliary control devices, annunciators, power supplies, and wiring(Vendor has to explore the requirement by visiting Site and drawing layout himself). The Panel shall be interface with a Public Address System to relay evacuation messages in case of a fire emergency. Each designated zone shall transmit separate and different alarm, supervisory and trouble signals to the Central Monitoring Stations and designated personnel in other buildings at the site via a multiplex communication network. The system shall also support independent gas release circuits for activation of Fire Suppression system. The system shall include hardware, modules to facilitate cross zoning of specific sensors, abort release functions, time delay and inputs for pressure switch and 24V output for solenoid operation. The panel shall be capable to further extend fire and fault output to the BMS for critical alarm monitoring, and it shall be possible to connect an interface card for open Protocol based (Commonly BACnet, Modbus or eqv.) output to enable a software level integration with the BMS System. The system and its components shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed under the appropriate UL testing standard as listed herein for fire alarm applications and the installation shall be in compliance with the UL listing. An intelligent reporting, microprocessor controlled fire detection system shall be installed in accordance with the specifications and drawings. The basic system comprises of main Addressable Intelligent fire alarm panels, Repeater Panels, Network Repeaters, Touch Screen Display The Low side of the System shall comprise of the initiating devices such as the smoke / Heat / Combination Sensors, Manual Pull Stations etc. Notification Appliances shall include Hooters, Strobes, Speakers and Speaker cum Strobes, speakers etc. All the above components shall be connected by interconnecting armoured copper cables, Fire Survival PVC grade for physical protection. Networking Communication cable between the various network nodes shall be armoured / Fiber Optic Cable / Twisted pair cable. The scope shall include laying of the cables described above, citing of the various components, networking and programming to achieve the desired functionality.



- 4 Loop, min 640-character touch screen display fire panel Station shall be kept on the 2nd floor in BMS Room - Network Repeater panel Station shall be provided at 3rd floor in Security room. The system shall be designed such that each signalling line circuit (SLC) is limited to only 80% of its total capacity at initial installation. 1. Initiation Device Circuits (IDC) shall be wired Class A (NFPA Style D) as part of an addressable device connected by the SLC Circuit. 2. On Style 6 or 7 (Class A) configurations a single ground fault or open circuit on the system signalling Line Circuit shall not cause system malfunction, loss of operating power or the ability to report an alarm. 3. Alarm signals arriving at the FACP shall not be lost following a primary power failure (or outage) until the alarm signal is processed and recorded. Basic System Functional Operation A. Activation of any system fire, security, supervisory, trouble, or status initiating device shall cause the following actions and indication to display in the panel. B. Fire Alarm Condition:

1. Sound an audible alarm and display a custom screen/message defining the building in

alarm and the specific alarm point initiating the alarm in a graphic display. The display shall provide standard NFPA graphical symbols indicating hazardous materials and personnel situations critical to situation management. Hazmat ICONs must conform to NFPA standard 170 format. The system shall supply a simple building floor plan and icons representing alarm devices in off normal or alarm condition.

2. Log to the system history archives all activity pertaining to the alarm condition. 3. Print to system printer (where required) alarm condition information. 4. Sound the ANSI 117-1 signal with synchronized audible and synchronized strobes

throughout the facility. 5. Audible signals shall be silenced from the fire alarm control panel by an alarm silence

switch. Visual signals shall be programmable to flash until system reset or alarm silencing, as required.

6. HVAC shut down shall, be accomplished by system operated duct detectors as per local

requirements. 7. Door closure devices shall operate by floor or by local requirements. C. Supervisory Condition:

i. Display the origin of the supervisory condition report at the local fire alarm control panel graphic LCD display.

ii. Activate supervisory audible and dedicated visual signal.



iii. Audible signals shall be silenced from the control panel by the supervisory

acknowledge switch.

iv. Record within system history the initiating device and time of occurrence of the event. 2. Print to the system printer (where required) the supervisory condition.

D. Trouble Condition:

1. Display at the local fire alarm control panel graphic LCD display, the origin of the trouble condition report.

2. Activate trouble audible and visual signals at the control panel and as indicated on the

drawings. a. Audible signals shall be silenced from the fire alarm control panel by a trouble

acknowledge switch. b. Trouble reports for primary system power failure to the master control shall be optionally

delayed for a period of time not greater than 200 seconds. Trouble conditions that have been restored to normal shall be automatically removed from the trouble display queue and nor require operator intervention. This feature shall be software selectable and shall not preclude the logging of trouble events to the historical file.

c. Record within system history, the occurrence of the event, the time of occurrence and the

device initiating the event. d. Print to the system printer (where required) the trouble condition. E. Security Condition: 1. Display at the local fire alarm control panel graphic LCD display, the origin of the

security condition report. A dedicated security LED shall flash until the alarm has been acknowledged, then revert to a steady "ON" state.

2. The control system shall be capable of bypassing the alarms from an individual security system installed within selected areas. The pass code allowing this function shall be assignable to individual security personnel and each bypass action shall be logged to system history. Intrusion alarms occurring during a bypass period shall be logged to history and displayed but no audible alarm shall occur at the control panel.

3. Print to the system printer (where required) the security condition.

4. The Local Fire Control Panel shall be “UL” 1076 listed for security purposes. CODES AND STANDARDS The publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are referenced in text by the basic designation only. A. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) - USA: No. 50 Cabinets and Boxes



No. 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signalling Systems No. 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signalling Systems No. 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications. No. 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective No. 228 Door Closers-Holders for Fire Protective Signalling Systems. No. 464 Audible Signalling Appliances. No. 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. No. 346 Water flow Indicators for Fire Protective Signalling Systems. No. 1481 Power supplies for Fire Protective Signalling Systems. No. 1076 Control Units for Burglar Alarm Proprietary Protective Signalling Systems. No. 1971 Visual Notification Appliances. NFPA CODE 70 (NEC) NFPA 72 Fire Alarm Code NFPA 101 Life Safety Code B. National Building Code of India, 2005. C. All requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). The system shall have proper listing and/or approval from the following nationally recognized agencies: UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. FM Factory Mutual The Fire Alarm Control Panel and all transponders shall meet the modular listing requirements of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Each sub-assembly, including all printed circuits, shall include the appropriate UL modular label. This includes all printed circuit board assemblies, power supplies, and enclosure parts. Systems that do not include modular labels may require return to the factory for system upgrades, and are not acceptable. PRODUCT / MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS Control Panel: A. The fire alarm control panel shall be microprocessor based using the multiple

microprocessors throughout the system providing rapid processing of smoke detector and other initiation device information to control system output functions. There shall be a watchdog circuit, which shall verify the system processors and the software program. Problems with either the processors or the system program shall activate a trouble signal, and reset the panel. The system modules shall communicate with an RS 485 network communications protocol. All module wiring shall be to terminal blocks, which will plug into the system card cage. The blocks shall be color coded to prevent accidental crossing of wiring.

B. The basic system shall have capabilities for 252 intelligent initiation devices and can be

expanded up to 2500 intelligent initiation devices. The system shall employ a flexible number of detection input loops to reach maximum system capacity. Systems which, have a fixed number of device addresses per node based on a fixed number of device circuits (loops) shall provide 20% of loop maximum spare capacity on all loops to meet this requirement.

C. The Device Loop Card shall be capable of minimum 252 intelligent devices distributed

between two SLC circuits. Any trouble on one circuit shall not affect the other circuit.



This module controls the signaling from the initiation devices reporting alarms and troubles to the control panel. This module shall also provide the signaling to the field devices for controlling the output of specific initiation devices. The circuit should be capable of being connected with polarity insensitive intelligent initiation devices. The circuits shall have the ability to be wired, Style 4, Style 6. Any of all of the 252 devices on the loop card shall be capable of activating up to two devices (relay base, audible base or remote lamps). These accessories shall not take away from the 252 addresses available per loop. Systems which, require unique addresses for SLC circuit accessories (remote relays, relay bases, audible bases and remote lamps) shall provide 50% spare capacity for each loop to provide for system expansion. Detector addressing should be digital, addressing via dip switch assembly will not be accepted. The on board microprocessor provides the loop card with the ability to function even if the main microprocessor fails. LED’s on the board shall provide annunciation for the following; Power, Card Failure, Network Failure, Ground. Fault, Alarm, Trouble, Short Zone 1, Short Zone 2, Style 6 Open Zone 1, Style 6 Open Zone 2. This card shall plug into the system card cage.

D. The Signal Line Circuits shall be tested for opens, shorts, ground faults, device status and

multiple device response (2 devices at same address) and communications with all addressable devices installed before connection to the control panel. Systems without this capability shall have a test panel installed for initial testing to eliminate any possible damage short term or long term to the control panel. After initial testing replace the test panel and proceed with complete testing.

E. The Person Machine Interface (Display) or the Remote Person Machine Interface

(Repeater) shall provide the system information on six inch ¼ VGA monochrome LCD, with Touch Screen and LED display. The DISPLAY shall provide floor plans with alarm type and “you are here” indication. The DISPLAY shall be navigable by device/module custom message in the system architecture with no need for device address knowledge. The DISPLAY shall provide a physical as well as a system geographic view. Graphic user interface shall be menu driven with 4 tabs showing the level and the total events for each tab. The tabs shall be; Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble and Security. Each level shall show 5 events simultaneously. The LED displays shall indicate Power, Audibles On or Silenced, and Partial system disabled. Systems not having the above LED’s shall provide separate LED’s within the control panel enclosure with appropriate labels. Selection buttons shall be backlit to aid the operator in the selection process. There shall be controls for scrolling throughout the event list. A button shall provide zoom in zoom out for the amount of information desired for a specific entry. The DISPLAY shall be capable of monitoring the power supply loading and show available capacity for future expansion planning. The DISPLAY LCD shall provide standard NFPA symbols showing Fire Service Equipment, Hazards, compliant with NFPA 170 and People in the area of alarm. Systems without this type of display shall supply a “UL” listed Graphics package with their system. The LCD shall have a keyboard screen to allow the technician ability to enter test and numbers for passwords or text changes.

F. The Zone Indicating Card shall contain 4 NAC circuits rated at 4 amps each with power-

limited outputs. All zone inputs for the card shall be isolated and independently supervised. There shall be at least 3 unique codes/signals for each circuit based on system logic. These signals shall be Temporal Code 3 (Evacuation), Steady (Such as “Recall”), and Alert (such as “Tornado Alert”). The card shall be listed for notification appliances, horns, bells, strobes, and speakers. The card shall also be listed for NFPA 13 Pre-Action Release, Halon 1301 NFPA 12A, NOVEC1230 NFPA 2001, Lease Line, and Municipal Tie. The card shall have the ability to wire the circuits Style Y or Style Z with outputs synchronized. The card shall have the following LED’s to provide trouble



shooting and annunciation; Reset, Power, Card Failure, Network Failure, Ground. Fault, Zone Activation or Trouble. This card shall plug into the system card cage.

G. The Network Interface Card shall provide communication between enclosures. The

network card supervises the network to insure proper operation. Any faults that are detected shall be reported to the DISPLAY for annunciation. The network card shall isolate short circuits to each individual segment of the network. If a short occurs only the segment between the network card will be affected. The card shall have the ability to provide Style 4 or 7 network wiring configurations. The card shall have as the minimum the following diagnostic LED; Reset, Power, Card Fail, CAN Fail, HNET Fail, ZNET Fail, GND Fault, Loop A Fail, Loop B fail, Networks - Style 7, Style 4, Gnd Fault Enabled, GND Fault Disabled.

H. The Controllable Relay Card shall provide 6 programmable relays. Each relay shall have

SPDT contacts rated at 4 amps at 30VDC/120VAC resistive and 3.5 amps, 120VAC inductive. The card shall have as a minimum the following diagnostic LED’s; Reset, Power, Card Fail, 24V Fail, Relay 1, Relay2, Relay3, Relay 4, Relay5, Relay6.

I. Where required to monitor a large amount of relays, such as monitoring subsystems or

normally open contact devices, provide a Supervised Input Module, which will monitor up to 16 inputs. Each input shall be individually programmed for supervised or non-supervised circuits. This module shall be connected to a system network. The module shall contain 2 programmable form “C” relays for control of the monitored subsystem.

a. Where required for control of relays or LED’s the Output control Module shall provide 16

open collector outputs to operate LED’s, incandescent lamps or relays as needed. The module shall contain a local audible output, Lamp Test and local audible silence. All circuits shall be power limited.

b. The system card cage shall provide the mounting of all system cards, field wiring, and

panel’s inter-card wiring. The terminal strips for the cards shall be color-coded to eliminate the possibility of making the wrong connection. The terminal blocks maybe disconnected and reconnected while the system is powered up without causing any difficulties. All power limited field wiring shall connect to the top of the card cage. All non-power limited internal wiring shall be connected to the bottom of the card cage. The card cage shall hold the systems cards and have capability of connecting multiple card cages to meet system demands.

J. System response time from alarm to output shall not exceed four (4) seconds. K. To expedite system troubleshooting, the system cards shall have ground fault detection,

and diagnostic LED’s by card. L. All system cards and modules shall have Flash memory for downloading the latest

module firmware. Power Supply: A. The system Power Supply/Charger shall be a 12-amp supply with battery charger. The

power supply shall be filtered and regulated. The power supply shall have a minimum of 1 power limited output rated at 4 amps, and a minimum of 1 output rated at 12 amps. The system power supply can be expanded up to 48 amps. The auxiliary power supply module shall share common batteries with the primary power supply. The system power



supply shall have 4 relays, one for common alarm, one for common trouble and two programmable relays. The power supply shall be rated for 120/240 VAC 50/60 Hz.

B. The battery charger shall be able to charge the system Lead Acid batteries up to 100 AH

batteries. Battery charging shall be microprocessor controlled and programmed with a special software package to select charging rates and battery sizes. An optional Thermistor for monitoring battery temperature to control charging rate shall be available.

C. The power supply shall have a plug for an AC adapter cable, which allows a technician to

plug in a laptop computer for up or down loading program information or test equipment. System Enclosures: A. Provide the enclosure needed to hold all the cards and modules as specified with at least spare capacity for two cards. The enclosures shall be either black or red. The outer doors shall be capable of being a left hand open or a right hand open. The inner door shall have a left hand opening. System enclosure doors shall provide where required ventilation for the modules or cards in the enclosure. Intelligent Initiation Devices: A. All initiation devices shall be insensitive to initiating loop polarity. Specifically, the devices

shall be insensitive to plus/minus voltage connections on either Style 4 or Style 6 circuits. B. The smoke detector shall be an intelligent digital photoelectric detector with a

programmable heat detector. Detectors shall be listed for use as open area protective coverage, in duct installation and duct sampling assembly installation and shall be insensitive to air velocity changes. The detector communications shall allow the detector to provide alarm input to the system and alarm output from the system within four (4) seconds. Detectors shall be programmable as application specific, selected in software for a minimum of eleven environmental fire profiles unique to the installed location. These fire profiles shall eliminate the possibility of false indications caused by dust, moisture, RFI/EMI, chemical fumes and air movement while factoring in conditions of ambient temperature rise, obscuration rate changes and hot/cold smoke phenomenon into the alarm decision to give the earliest possible real alarm condition report. The intelligent smoke detector shall be capable of providing three distinct outputs from the control panel. The system controlled output functions shall be from an individual or unique input of smoke obscuration, a thermal condition or a combination of obscuration and thermal conditions. The detector shall be designed to eliminate calibration errors associated with field cleaning of the chamber. The detector shall support the use of a relay and LED remote indicator at the same time. Low profile, white case shall not exceed 2.5 inches of extension below the finish ceiling. Detector wiring shall not require any special shielded cable.

C. Thermal Detectors shall be rated at 135 degrees fixed temperature and 15 degrees per

minute rate of rise. Detectors shall be constructed to compensate for the thermal lag inherent in conventional type detectors due to the thermal mass, and alarm at the set point of 135 degrees Fahrenheit. The choice of alarm reporting as a fixed temperature detector or a combination of fixed and rate of rise shall be made in system software and be changeable at any time without the necessity of hardware replacement. The detectors furnished shall have a listed spacing for coverage up to 2,500 square feet and shall be installed according to the requirements of NFPA 72 for open area coverage.



D. The smoke detector shall be an intelligent digital photoelectric detector with a

programmable heat detector. Detectors shall be listed for use as open area protective coverage, in duct installation and sampling assembly installation and shall be insensitive to air velocity changes. The detector communications shall allow the detector to provide alarm input to the system and alarm output from the system within four (4) seconds. The detector shall be mounted in a duct detector housing listed for that purpose. The duct detector shall support the use of a remote test switch, relay or LED remote indicator. The duct detector shall be supplied with the appropriate sampling tubes to fit the installation. Where duct detectors are exposed to the weather provide a weatherproof enclosure.

E. Detector bases shall be low profile twist lock type with screw clamp terminals and self-

wiping contacts. Bases shall be installed on an industry standard, 4" square or octagonal electrical outlet box.

a. Where selective localized control of electrical devices is required for system operation,

furnish and install detector base with software programmed addressable relay integral to the base. The relay shall switch electrical loads within relay ratings, as indicated on the drawings. Operation of the addressable control circuit shall be independent of the number of detectors and relays on the circuit or the number in an alarm state. Relay bases shall be rated for resistive or inductive load (120VAC or 30VDC) 3 amps.

b. Where indicated on the drawings, furnish detector base with integral approved audible

evacuation alarm signal having an output of 85db. The audible signal shall be individually addressable and software programmed for operation.

i. Provide single action addressable manual stations where shown on the drawings, to be

flush or surface mounted as required. Manual stations shall contain the intelligence for reporting address, identity, alarm and trouble to the fire alarm control panel. The manual station communications shall allow the station to provide alarm input to the system and alarm output from the system within less than four (4) seconds. The manual station shall be equipped with terminal strip and pressure style screw terminals for the connection of field wiring. Surface mounted stations where indicated on the drawings shall be mounted using a manufacturer's prescribed matching red enamel outlet box.

ii. Addressable Interface Devices shall be provided to monitor contacts for such items as water-flow, tamper, and PIV switches connected to the fire alarm system. These interface devices shall be able to monitor a single or dual contacts. An address will be provided for each device and all physical devices shall require only one address on a signaling line circuit regardless of the number of circuits on an individual module. Where remote supervised relay is required the interface shall be equipped with a SPDT relay rated for 4 amps resistive and 3.5 amps inductive.

Notification Appliances: A. The Horn or horn/strobe appliance as indicated on the drawings shall be a synchronized

temporal horn with a synchronized strobe light with multiple candela taps to meet the intended application. The appliance shall be red or white as indicated on the drawings. The strobe light taps shall be adjustable for 15/75, 30/75, 75, and 110 candela. The appliance shall be red for wall mounted and white for ceiling mounted. Ceiling mounted appliances shall be rated for that application.



B. The electronic chime or chime/strobe as indicated on the drawings shall be a speaker with a tone card and have and adjustable range of 700 to 1300 Hz. The chime or chime/strobe shall be adjustable for either single stroke or continuous operation. The chime/strobe shall be available with adjustable strobe intensities of 15, 30, 75, and 110 candela. The appliance shall be red for wall mounted and white for ceiling mounted. Ceiling mounted appliances shall be rated for that application.

C. The strobe only appliance as indicated on the drawings shall be a synchronized strobe

light with multiple candela taps to meet the intended application. The strobe light taps shall be adjustable for 15, 30, 75, and 110 candela. The appliance shall be red for wall mounting and white for ceiling mounted. Ceiling mounted appliances shall be rated for that application.

D. Where required provide a 10” bell where indicated on drawings to be connected to a non-

silenceable circuit for activation of the sprinkler system. E. An alarm extender panel shall be provided where needed. The power supply shall be a

minimum of 6 amps. The power supply shall contain four supervised notification circuits maximum of 3 amps each circuit. The power supply shall contain built-in synchronizing modules for strobes and audibles. There shall be a 3 amp filtered auxiliary power limited output. There shall be a minimum of 8 options as to the operations of the inputs and outputs.

Installation: A. Perform work in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 72. B. Fasten equipment to structural members of building or metal supports attached to

structure, or to concrete surfaces. C. Limited energy cable installation is allowed under Div. 16, all cable runs shall be run at

right angles to building walls, supported from structure at intervals not exceeding 3 feet and where installed in environmental air plenums, be rated for such use and tied/supported by components listed for environmental air plenums installation.

Boxes, Enclosures and Wiring Devices: A. Boxes shall be installed plumb and firmly in position. B. Extension rings with blank covers shall be installed on junction boxes where required. C. Junction boxes served by concealed conduit shall be flush mounted. D. Upon initial installation, all wiring outlets, junction, pull and outlet boxes shall have dust

covers installed. Dust covers shall not be removed until wiring installation when permanent dust covers or devices are installed.

E. "Fire Alarm System" decal or silk-screened label shall be applied to all junction box

covers. Conductors:



A. Each conductor shall be identified as shown on the drawings at each with wire markers at terminal points. Attach permanent wire markers within 2 inches of the wire termination. Marker legends shall be visible.

B. All wiring shall be supplied and installed in compliance with the requirements of the

National Electric Code, NFPA 70, Article 760, and that of the manufacturer. C. Wiring for strobe and audible circuits shall be a minimum 14 AWG, signal line circuits shall

be minimum 18 AWG. D. All splices shall be made using solderless connectors. All connectors shall be installed in

conformance with the manufacturer recommendations. E. Crimp-on type spade lugs shall be used for terminations of stranded conductors to binder

screw or stud type terminals. Spade lugs shall have upset legs and insulation sleeves sized for the conductors.

F. Permanently label or mark each conductor at both ends with permanent alphanumeric wire

markers. G. A consistent color code for fire alarm system conductors throughout the installation. H. The installation contractor shall submit for approval prior to installation of wire, a proposed

color code for system conductors to allow rapid identification of circuit types. I. Wiring within sub panels shall be arranged and routed to allow accessibility to equipment for

adjustment and maintenance. Devices: A. Relays and other devices to be mounted in auxiliary panels are to be securely fastened to avoid false indications and failures due to shock or vibration. B. Wiring within sub-panels shall be arranged and routed to allow accessibility to equipment for adjustment and maintenance. C. All devices and appliances shall be mounted to or in an approved electrical box. D. Devices shall be of types appropriate to the local environment. For example, optical smoke detectors shall not be installed in areas where there is likely to be steam or dust present. Also, manual call points shall be fitted with transparent hinged covers where there is the possibility of accidental operation, e.g. in kitchens or service areas. Certificate of Compliance: Complete and submit to the Project Engineer in accordance with NFPA 72, 1999 edition section 1-6.2. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing, general



1. All Alarm Initiating Devices shall be observed and logged for correct zone and sensitivity. These devices and their bases shall be tagged with adhesive tags located in an area not visible when installed, showing the initials of the installing technician and date.

2. Wiring runs shall be tested for continuity, short circuits and grounds before system is

energized. Resistance, current and voltage readings shall be made as work progresses.

3. A systematic record shall be maintained of all readings using schedules or charts of

tests and measurements. Areas shall be provided on the logging form for readings, dates and witnesses.

4. The acceptance inspector shall be notified before the start of the required tests. All

items found at variance with the drawings or this specification during testing or inspection by the acceptance inspector shall be corrected.

5. Test reports shall be delivered to the acceptance inspector as completed.

6. The installing contractor shall make instruments, tools and labor required to conduct

the system tests available.

7. The following equipment shall be a minimum for conducting the tests: I. Ladders and scaffolds as required to access all installed equipment. II. Multimeter for reading voltage, current and resistance.

III. Two way radios and flashlights. IV. A manufacturer recommended device for measuring airflow through air duct

smoke detector sampling assemblies. V. Decibel meter.

In addition to the testing specified to be performed by the installing contractor, the installation shall be subject to test by the Engineer of Record and the AHJ. Acceptance Testing:

A. A written acceptance test procedure (ATP) for testing the fire alarm system components and installation will be prepared by the engineer in accordance with NFPA 72 and this specification. The contractor shall be responsible for the performance of the ATP, demonstrating the function of the system and verifying the correct operation of all system components, circuits, and programming.

B. A program matrix shall be prepared by the installing contractor referencing each alarm input to every output function affected as a result of an alarm condition on that input.

C. The installing contractor prior to the ATP shall prepare a complete listing of all device labels for alphanumeric annunciator displays.

D. The acceptance inspector shall use the system record drawings in combination with the documents specified under paragraph 3.01 during the testing procedure to verify operation as programmed. In conducting the ATP, the acceptance inspector shall request demonstration of any or all input and output functions.

E. The items tested shall include but not be limited to the following:



• System wiring shall be tested to show the following results and the system subsequence operation: open, Shorted or Grounded Circuits.

• Primary and Battery power disconnected.

• System notification circuits and appliances operate as programmed. Audibility and Visual levels meet required standards.

• System shall demonstrate the correct messages at the FACP and Remote Annunciator.

• System off site reporting shall be verified for alarm, supervisory and trouble.

• System shall be tested for stand-by battery back up as outline in this specification. Documentation: System documentation shall be supplied to the owner and shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. System record drawings and wiring details including one set of reproducible drawings, and a DVD with copies of the record drawings in DXF format for use in a CAD drafting program.

2. System Operating, Installation and Maintenance Manuals. 3. System matrix showing input signals to output commands.

4. Provide a copy of the system program on a 3 floppy disk. Warranty and Services: A. The contractor shall warranty the entire system for electrical and mechanical failures for a

period Two years. The warranty shall begin with the completion of the acceptance testing or when beneficial use to the owner is determined.

B. The fire alarm system subcontractor or manufacturer shall offer for the owner’s

consideration at the time of system submittal a priced inspection, maintenance, testing and repair contract in full compliance with the requirements of NFPA 72.

C. The contractor performing the contract services shall be qualified, factory trained and

certified in the service and the maintenance of the system provided and listed to maintain ongoing certification of the completed system to the “UL” installed system listing.

D. The installation contractor shall furnish training as follows: a. Training in the receipt, handling and acknowledgment of alarms. b. Training in the system operation including manual control of output functions from the

system control panel. E. The total training requirement shall be a minimum of 2 hours, but shall be sufficient to

cover all items specified. The contractor shall provide two such training sessions.



PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM Scope of Work The scope of work under this head shall include designing supplying and installing of Public

Address System. The work under this system shall consist of furnishing all materials, equipment’s and appliances and labor necessary to install the said system, complete with Speakers, Amplifiers, Mike and Zone selection Panel.

The PA System is designed to serve the multipurpose of playing music, making general

announcement or to transmit the fire tone under fire condition. System Design The Speakers shall be distributed in the entire floor and shall be configured in different

zones. The announcement can be made in zone wise or to all the speakers simultaneously in ALL CALL mode. Fire Alarm shall be announced immediately on receipt of Fire signal from the panel to all zones.

Speakers

• Ceiling Mounted Speakers The speaker shall be flush mounted in the False Ceiling cavity and shall be suitable for a

general purpose applications such as Public Address, Music Reproduction etc., The Speaker shall consists of a single piece 6 W dual cone loudspeaker, frame, a 100 V

line matching transformer and a circular metal grille. The speaker shall come with a screw terminal block for line matching transformer connection. The speakers shall also meet the following specifications

Rated voltage : 100 V AC Rated impedance : 1667 Ohms Effective frequency range : 70 to 18000 Hz

Opening angle (1 KHz/ 4 KHz) : 160/ 55 Power handling capacity : Min 6 watts with a tapping facility for 1.5,3,6 W Sound pressure level at 1 KHz, 6W, 1m : Min 99dB Sound pressure level at 1 KHz, 1W, 1m : Min 91dB Speaker diameter : 200 mm Connection : 2 pole Push Connection Operating Temperature : -25°C to +55°C

• Wall Mounted Speakers The speaker shall be wall mounted type and shall be suitable for a general purpose

applications such as Public Address, Music Reproduction etc., The Speaker shall consists of a wall mount enclosure, 6W high quality speakers and a 100

V line matching transformer. The speaker shall come with a screw terminal block for line matching transformer connection for full load and shall also have a provision for secondary tappings. Connectors shall be provided on the rear of the speakers for cable connections.



There shall be a uniformity of sound both in loudness & quality. The speaker shall be

designed to minimize reverberation effects, howling etc., caused due to reflection of sound from hard surfaces. The speakers shall also meet the following specifications


Opening angle(1 KHz/ 4 KHz) : 100/ 80 Power handling capacity : Min 6 watts with a tapping facility for 1.5,3,6 W Connection : 3-way screw connector Operating Temperature : -25°C to +55°C

• Horn Type Speakers The speaker shall be wall/ Column mounted type and shall be suitable for a general

purpose applications such as Public Address, Music Reproduction etc., The horn loud speaker shall consists of a IP65 water & dust protection ABS enclosure with

a mounting bracket, 15/25/30 W high quality speaker and a built in 100 V line matching transformer. The speaker shall come with necessary connections for line matching transformer for full load and shall also have a provision for secondary tapings. The speaker shall come with at least 2 meter connecting cable.

The speaker shall be capable of performing under industrial factory environments with long

operating life without any performance deterioration. The speakers shall also meet the following specifications


Opening angle – Hor (1 KHz/ 4 KHz) : 105/ 90

Opening angle - Ver(1 KHz/ 4 KHz) : 110/ 125 Power handling capacity : Min 30 watts with a tapping facility for 30,15

7.5,3.5 Watts Sound pressure level at 1 KHz, 30W, 1m : Min 112dB Sound pressure level at 1 KHz, 1W, 1m : Min 97dB Connection : screw terminal block Operating Temperature : -25°C to +55°C Amplifier The main function of the power amplifier shall be the amplification of audio signals for the

speakers. It shall be possible to select the output voltage between 100V, 70V or 50V by changing outputs The Booster mono amplifiers shall be capable of operating for speech and music applications. They shall be mounted on a suitable 19” Euro Racks.

The power amplifiers shall have adequate continuous power output to meet the

requirement of the configuration. The unit shall be capable of delivering the rated output watts with less than 0.1% harmonic distortion in the design band width. The amplifier shall have a broad band frequency response of 50 Hz to 20 KHz. The output voltage and impedance shall meet with the system requirements.



Amplifiers shall be protected against over loads and output shorts and a special thermal

overload on the heat sink. Additionally, all booster amplifiers have an overheat protection circuit that switches off the power stage if the internal temperature reaches a critical limit due to poor ventilation or overload. A temperature-controlled fan shall be provided to ensure high reliability at high output power and low acoustic noise at lower power output.

. Balanced input and a loop-through connector shall be available for easy connection of

multiple booster amplifiers to increase the available output power. The power amplifier shall obtain two balanced inputs with priority control, each with a loop-through facility. This allows for easy and automatic switching between e.g. a local music source and a priority announcement from a remote system. It shall be possible to connect multiple Booster amplifiers for single zone by using just loop thro connectors and it shall also be possible to connect one amplifier to multiple zones thro router. The amplifier shall also meet the following specifications

EMC emission acc. to EN 55103-1 EMC immunity acc. to EN 55103-2 PERFORMANCE Frequency response 50 Hz – 20 kHz (+1/-3 dB, @ -10 dB ref. rated output) Distortion <1% @ rated output power, 1 kHz INPUTS Line input (3-pin XLR, 6.3mm phone jack, balanced) Sensitivity 1 V Impedance 20 kOhm CMRR >25 dB (50 Hz-20 kHz) Line input 1, 2 (3-pin XLR, balanced) CMRR >25 dB (50 Hz-20 kHz) 100V input (Screw, unbalanced) Sensitivity 100 V Impedance 330 kOhm OUTPUTS Line loop through output (3-pin XLR, 6.3mm phone jack, balanced) Nominal level 1 V Impedance direct connection to line input Line loop through output 1,2 (3-pin XLR, balanced) Impedance direct connection to line input Loudspeaker outputs (Screw, floating) Output power @ 24 V Battery operation -1 dB ref. rated power ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS Operating temperature range min -10 to +550C Relative humidity min 90% Zone Selection Panel



The user interface to the entire public address system shall be the Zone Selection Panel. It shall be able to address 20 zones.

The Panel shall have one Microphone for announcements. The selection of announcement

is done through the Panel. The announcement/Fire tone can be made zone wise. The Control Panel shall have individual zone selection switches as well as ALL CALL switch.

The Zone selection panel shall include a tone generator that shall serve the purpose of

generating a unique fire tone in case of fire

P A System Wiring PA system wiring shall be done with 2 X 0.75sq.mm cable in 19mm dia PVC conduit

including termination complete as required. The speakers in each zone are connected in parallel and are connected to the respective

output. The cables from each zone are separately routed and terminated in the Panel. Testing and commissioning Entire PA system shall be tested to establish the following.

Functionality of the PA system Combined systems shall be tested for the overriding feature for prioritizing fire alarm and life safety requirements. Acceptable audibility of the public address in all spaces and record sound pressure levels of the Public address viz a viz the ambient noise levels.



IP BASED CCTV SYSTEM GENERAL DESCRIPTION The DC area is spread in 2 floors with critical Areas(Server Rooms, IBMS Room, Security room , UPS Room, Battery room, Panel room on both the floors. ) A Redundant IBMS Room provided on both the Floors. IP Based CCTV system shall be provided for the entire Data Center area, and shall be address the Internal surveillance for the Monitoring the Server Aisles, Entrance to Critical Spaces, and Corridors leading to critical spaces. The CCTV Vendor shall supply install and commission an IP Camera based CCTV system with the objective shall be to provide High degree of Electronic surveillance system to the entire Data Center. The purpose is to monitor & supervise the entire area for security purposes, as well as the record and inform officials on unwanted, untoward incidents. It is also essential to have recorded images to be stored at least for 90 days of all critical areas to facilitate investigations of a reported case. The Hardware required for the System including servers, workstations, monitors, networking components, cables, connectors, conduits, power supplies etc. shall be in vendor’s scope. Development of independent network for IP CCTV shall be Scope CCTV vendor. Further, the CCTV system shall provide the direct interface with other security systems such as the Access Control Systems, IBMS, fire systems. This shall be achieved either by offering a unified database for the IBMS, or by suitable SDK/API’s middleware solution to enable the seamless transfer of data between disparate systems. Bidder shall provide a system configuration wherein Main Directory shall be loaded on the Main Server hardware located in the BMS Room at 2nd / 3rd Floor; And The Secondary directory shall be loaded on one of the Redundant Servers, which shall kept at 3rd / 2nd floor Redundant BMS Room. Given the Criticality of the Tier III operations and the security perspective, 100% redundant recording shall be provisioned for this project. The CCTV Servers on the 2nd / 3rd Floor shall be the Main Archiving and Processing servers, whereas the CCTV Servers on any of the BMS Room shall serve as the “Parallel Redundant Servers” Video Data shall be archived simultaneously on both sets of the Servers to fulfil “Parallel Redundancy”. If one of the Servers on a Server Bank Fails, the CCTV Client should show an Alarm, but should be seamlessly be able to draw data from the redundant server. Similarly, for separate servers are provided for Directory database and failover directory database. Bidder has to note that the total in any configuration offered, the storage requirements (90 days of storage) given in the tender should NOT be compromised. For storage calculation



For NON Server area: Calculated @ H.265 Compression, 25 fps @ 2MP Resolution, 90 days of recording, @ average of 12 hours / day recording .(Medium Video Quality) For Server Rooms: Calculated @ H.265 Compression, 25 fps @ 2 MP, 90 days of recording @ average of 6 hours/ day recording.(High Video Quality) Bidders to work out their storage requirements based on the Storage Data Table included in this Specification. Storage size and server quantities indicated in BOQ are to be treated as minimum requirement, whereas vendor shall cater for additional servers/storages as required to fulfil above requirement and other tender specifications of failover/redundant functionalities. Power Quality at site: Note that AC Power Quality Available on the Site shall be 230 V AC +/- 5%, 50 Hz +/- 5%. For the internal surveillance of the Data center area, strategically placed video surveillance cameras shall provide continuous monitoring of all parts of the Data Centre area. A. All equipment and materials used shall be standard components that are regularly manufactured and used in the system. B. All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use. APPLICABLE STANDARDS Original Equipment Manufacturer Standard APPROVALS All the cameras should be A. CE Compliant and B. UL Listed and C. FCCB PRODUCT / MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS Overview of system: Overall system cameras spread across the facility covering entire activity in the DC to ensure optimum coverage, no blind spot should be there. The system shall be designed to avoid any loss of video even during failures of one or more servers by provision of Main Archiving and Parallel Redundant recording architecture. Considering the number of cameras used in the project it would not be practical to monitor all the cameras all the time in control. So system shall be configured with intelligent monitoring scheme as below. 1) There should be big size display unit (LED 42” ) in the BMS room(2nd Floor), a redundant arrangement with display unit will be placed in(3rd Floor) and the



IPCCTV system should be able to deliver image feed of all the cameras to this display unit. [Proposed Display Units requirement is 2 Units for each floor, however Vendor has to evaluate during the site visit for better proposition) 2) The layouts on the Multiplexed Monitor shall change every 10 seconds so as to complete the monitoring of cameras in rotation.( This shall be discussed with the Security and O&M team of client and the exact scheme of multiplexing shall be accordingly decided.) 5) The 21” monitor of each operator should be configurable to display 4 or 16 (16/32) most critical cameras of his/her respective area to ensure round the clock monitoring of the same. 6) The Display unit shall also be configured to display the alarm related camera popup on receipt of alarm from motion detection/ACS etc. 7) One of the 21” monitor of each operator shall be used by operator actively to see the randomly selected cameras in full screen mode in case required. This monitor shall also automatically popup with map of area relevant to the alarm so as operator can immediately pickup additional camera display from surrounding area in case required. 8) All the highest priority Level 1 critical alarms shall be configured to popup on one of the relevant operator screen as well as on supervisor screen. If it is not responded by one of them, then it shall be automatically forwarded to other operators after escalation timeout. 9) Other medium priority Level 2 alarm shall popup on relevant operator screen and automatically forwarded to other operators after escalation timeout. If it is not acknowledged by any of them then only it shall be escalated to supervisor. 10) Independent escalation matrix with different escalation timeout shall be configurable in system for every alarm depending on its criticality. 11) It shall be possible to mask the portion of image from some sensitive camera pictures to maintain the privacy/secrecy not being compromised by displaying them on the control room screens. But it shall be possible for the supervisor to unmask such areas if required during live display or playback. 12) Any attempt to delete any recorded video files from the system by any way shall raise the alarm immediately to the security head screen. Detailed system specifications DVMS software Modules 1. 64-bit support a. All server components shall be available in 64-bit versions. 2. Management server a. A management server shall control the DVMS so that the system administrator has

full control of all system components locally, or from a remote location.



The management server shall contain the following services, which by default shall be installed on the same server as the management server software. It shall be possible to install on other servers if required: Event server service - a service for storing and handling incoming alarm data and events. It shall enable monitoring and instant overview of alarms and possible technical problems within the system via the map function. Log server service, based on the IIS, Internet Information Services. It shall provide necessary functionality for logging information from the DVMS. Service channel service - based on the IIS, Internet Information Services. It shall enable automatic and transparent configuration communication between servers and clients in the DVMS. Data collector server service, a service for collecting performance counters values on servers and cameras that shall be used in the system monitoring function. The management server shall be able to handle client login, system configurations, performance counters and logging. The management server shall be able to store the system’s configuration in a relational database, either on the management server computer, or on a Microsoft SQL Server on the network. 1. Failover management server a. The management server shall provide a resilient system solution, based on

Windows Server Clustering, to secure maximum uptime. b. The software solution shall support an installation on multiple servers within a

cluster of two servers, or more. In case a server in the cluster fails, another server in the cluster shall automatically take over the failed server’s job running the management server. The process of switching over the server service to run another server in the cluster shall happen automatically.

2. Recording server a. The software solution shall support an unlimited number of recording servers. One

or more recording servers shall be used in a software solution, depending on the number of cameras or the configuration of the physical system.

b. Recording servers shall be able to record video feeds and communicate with cameras and other devices.

c. Each recording server shall have a default storage container where the database content, primarily recordings from the connected cameras, shall be stored.

d. Recordings from each connected camera shall be stored in individual camera databases.

e. The software solution shall not limit the amount of storage allocated for each connected device.

f. To facilitate post-deployment system performance optimization and seamless system expansion, DVMS introduces the ability to move a camera between two recording servers in runtime.

Failover recording server a. The software solution shall support automatic failover for recording servers. This

functionality must be accomplished by a failover server that shall work as a standby unit, which takes over in the event that one of a group of designated recording



servers fails. Recordings shall be synchronized back to the original recording server once it is back online.

The system shall support multiple failover servers for a group of recording servers. The system shall provide monitoring of all failover servers from a graphical alarm management feature. The system shall provide seamless access to recordings on the failover server for all clients through the same client views once the services are fully started. Hot standby recording server a. The hot standby recording server shall have the same functionality as the failover

recording server, but shall be a dedicated hot-standby server for a single recording server.

Event server a. An event server shall manage all event- and map-related communication. It shall

store events, image files and map configurations, and shall make status information about the surveillance system available.

b. Improved Event Server performance c. The implementation of the Event Server have been optimized to be able to handle

events in very large systems. The preliminary performance gain indicates a tenfold performance enhancement measured as number of handled events per hour.

Failover event server a. The failover server shall provide a resilient system solution, based on Windows

Server Clustering, to secure maximum uptime. The software solution shall support an installation on multiple servers within a cluster of two servers, or more. In case a server in the cluster fails, another server in the cluster shall automatically take over the failed server’s job running the management server. The process of switching over the server service to run another server in the cluster shall happen automatically. Clients 1. Management client

a. The DVMS shall support a centralized management client to control the DVMS. The management client shall provide a feature-rich administration client for system configuration and day-to-day administration of the system. The management client shall typically be installed on the DVMS administrator’s workstation. The management client shall be used to authorize the recording servers connected to the system. 2. Full viewing client

a. The full viewing client shall enable operators to connect to the software solution for

initial authorization. Upon authorization, the full viewing client shall be able to connect to the recording server(s), for access to video recordings.

b. It shall be possible to view live video from cameras on the DVMS from 1 to 100 per view.



DVMS should have ability to render video using hardware accelerated decoding in the Video Client. This gives significant performance improvements both in video rendering performance, reduced RAM usage and up to 75% reduction in the CPU load of the workstation running the DVMS Video Client.

Web viewing client (cross-platform) a. The software solution shall support a free web viewing client accessible through

Internet browsers that shall allow users to access cameras, views and recordings without installing any software.

b. The web viewing client shall support the following browsers: Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, Google Chrome, Opera and Safari.

c. The web viewing client shall be able to run on the supported browsers without installing any components on the client PC.

d. The web viewing client shall connect to the software solution through a server component that shall be installed on the software solution.

e. The software solution shall allow users of the web viewing client to make video exports without transferring the data to the client PC. It shall then be possible to download exports on-demand from the web viewing client, or access them directly from the software solution system storage.

Standalone viewing client a. The software solution shall include a standalone viewing client that shall be able to

play back video files exported from clients in proprietary database format. b. The standalone viewing client shall be able to play back encrypted video files in the

proprietary database format. System

1. Unlimited number of recording servers per system a. The software solution shall support an unlimited number of recording servers. One

or more recording servers shall be used in a system, depending on the number of cameras or the configuration of the physical system.

2. Unlimited number of cameras per recording server

a. The software solution shall allow for the connection of an unlimited number of cameras or other devices for each recording server.

3. Unlimited video retention time

a. The software solution shall not place limits on video retention time, making it possible to save recorded video for as long as needed.



Simultaneous live, recording and playback capability a. The software solution shall support simultaneous live, recording, playback and

export capability.

Remote connect services a. Remote connect services shall enable the DVMS to retrieve video and audio from

external cameras where firewalls and/or router network configuration normally prevents initiating connections to such cameras. The communication takes place via Axis one-click connection component.

b. Axis one-click connection component shall provide a secure connection between a camera and the surveillance system.

c. Only devices holding a valid key shall be able to operate within the Axis one-click connection component. This shall provide a secure tunnel where data can be exchanged between public networks in a safe way.

Edge storage support with flexible retrieval a. The DVMS shall support edge storage which secures that video from cameras can

be sent to the DVMS in the event that the connection between a camera and the DVMS is lost, by saving recordings on the camera’s internal storage and then sent to the DVMS once the connection between camera and the DVMS is restored.

b. The edge storage shall secure that the camera records the video stream directly on its own internal storage, if the connection between the hardware and the recording server is terminated, for example due to recording server crash, power failure on the recording server machine, network failure or in case of a controlled shut down of the recording server. For example, in case of maintenance or upgrade.

c. Users of the full viewing client shall be able to retrieve recordings from a camera with edge storage remote site, connected to the DVMS through an interconnected systems feature, for example buses or ships, which are then entered into the system when the bus or ships comes within network range.

d. The DVMS shall make it possible to set up a rule or an event that retrieves recordings from a selected amount of time before scheduled recording has taken place, for example 30 minutes before scheduled recording began, which then enables full viewing client operators to view recordings from that time frame in the DVMS.

e. The DVMS shall make it possible to set up a rule or an event that retrieves recordings from a certain time frame before scheduled recording has taken place, for example from 8 PM to 9 PM, which then enables full viewing client operators to view recordings from that time frame in the DVMS.

Integrated monitoring wall feature a. The monitoring wall feature shall be hardware agnostic (open platform) b. The monitoring wall feature shall support an unlimited number of monitoring wall

displays c. The monitoring wall shall show an unlimited number of concurrent video streams d. The monitoring wall feature shall support presets for display layout and camera

contents e. The monitoring wall feature shall support a rule-based and manual control of layout

and content.



f. Share important information with control room personnel using manual text messages or pre-defined messages that are displayed on certain events and incidents.

g. Black screen monitoring is a new capability that allows operators to focus on critical

activities. In Monitor Wall cameras can automatically be removed from the Monitor Wall when an incident has been cleared. This means that the control room operators only are presented with the relevant video feeds.

h. In addition to live video the version of Monitor Wall supports playback of video,

where any authorized operator seamlessly can control playback of video from his/her Video Client. This enables collaboration in assessment of incidents and investigations.

i. To enable flexible and efficient collaboration in control rooms the 2016 version of

Monitor Wall supports a wide set of different content. This means that operators instantly can share alarms, still images, bookmarks, maps, carrousels, etc. with peers, and coordinate effort and responses

j. DVMS Smart Wall introduces the ability to render video using hardware accelerated

decoding in the Monitor Wall. This gives significant performance improvements both in video rendering performance, reduced RAM usage and up to 75% reduction in the CPU load of the workstation running the DVMS Monitor Wall.

Metadata a. The software solution shall support video-related metadata from cameras a. The software solution shall make incoming metadata information available for users

of the full viewing client or external integrations. b. The software solution shall support motion metadata generated by the system’s

internal video motion detection functionality to provide a fast search of video sequences within a specific area of a camera’s view.

c. The software solution shall make support an ONVIF compliant framework for transparent handling of metadata generated as part of edge-based video in cameras to show identified objects by bounding boxes in the full viewing client, both in live view and in playback view.

Locking evidence a. The software solution shall make it possible to extend the retention time for video

evidence from selected cameras and related devices in a defined time interval by overriding normal video archiving settings to ensure that the video is not deleted from the system.

Support for MJPEG, MPEG-4 SP, MPEG-4 ASP, MxPEG and H.265 compression formats b. The software solution shall support H.265, MPEG-4 (both ASP and SP), and

MJPEG compression formats for the video stream from all devices including analog cameras connected to encoders, DVRs, and IP cameras connected to the system.

c. The software solution shall support the MxPEG video compression algorithm, unique to Mobotix. MxPEG encoding shall have the capability to maintain high



image quality for megapixel cameras while dramatically decreasing bandwidth consumption.

Support for ONVIF™ and PSIA compliant devices a. The software solution shall support interoperability with the IP camera standards

Physical Security Interoperability Alliance (PSIA) and the Open Network Video Interface Forum (ONVIF).

Generic device support via universal driver a. The software solution shall include a universal driver that shall support any generic

network camera. The driver must be able to handle standard video streaming formats including MJPEG, MPEG4 and H.265.

IP device brands and models directly supported via dedicated driver a. A continuously updated list of supported brands and models shall be made available

by the software manufacturer.

Secure HTTPS camera connectivity (on supported devices) a. The software solution shall support the use of secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol

Secure (HTTPS) using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) to establish a secure connection between supported hardware devices and the software solution.

Multi-streaming (one or more live streams plus one recording stream) a. The software solution shall allow live multi-streaming from the cameras in different

resolutions, formats, and frame rates. b. When running a JPEG stream, it shall be possible to record less JPEG images than

the amount of JPEG images retrieved in the stream, for example receive or view live 25 images and only record 5.

Built-in video motion detection (VMD) a. The VMD shall be able to detect motion on key frames or at a set interval. b. VMD exclusion zones shall ensure that the software solution does not detect motion

in selected areas of an image. c. The software solution shall make it possible to set automatic adjustable motion

detection sensitivity to optimize the motion detection algorithm according to the background noise level in a video stream in changing light conditions.

d. The VMD shall be able to generate motion metadata. Set video motion detection per camera a. The software solution shall provide the possibility to set video motion detection on a

per camera basis. MPEG 4/H.265 support a. On select devices, it shall be possible to customize the keyframe interval. b. Flexible control of recording characteristics shall make it possible to choose

between recording keyframes only or the full video stream.



Input, output and events a. The software solution shall support setting up or adding events rules or time profiles

in the DVMS which shall be used for triggering actions. The DVMS shall support the following events:

1) Hardware-related events (configurable or predefined) 2) Device-related events (configurable or predefined) 3) External events (Predefined, generic or user-defined) 4) Recording server-related events

The DVMS shall support attaching external units, typically external sensors, to input ports on devices. The DVMS shall support attaching external units to output ports on devices. This shall allow operators to, for example, turn on/turn off lights. Notifications The software solution shall make it possible to set notification profiles which shall allow email notifications to be pre-defined and automatically sent by a rule. The software solution shall support the attachment of still images (JPEG), AVI video clips and system information to the e-mail. The software solution shall act as an SNMP agent which can generate an SNMP trap as a result of rule activation in addition to other existing rule actions. Microsoft® Active Directory support and basic users

a. The software solution shall support Active Directory to add users and groups. b. The software solution shall support defining users directly in the DVMS. Bookmark function

a. The software solution shall include a bookmarking feature which shall allow users of

the full viewing client to mark incidents on live and/or playback streams. The software solution shall make it possible to:

• Set manual bookmarks (quick bookmarks and bookmarks with details).

• Set bookmarks via rules set up in the DVMS

• Edit, delete and search for the bookmarks.

• See instant preview of bookmarks in timeline

• List and preview bookmarks in recording searches

• Print bookmark report

• Perform a direct video export of a bookmark Map function

a. The full viewing client shall include a built-in map function which shall provide an

intuitive overview of the system and shall offer integrated access to all system components.

b. The map function shall be able to use standard graphical file formats including: jpg, gif, png, and tif.

c. The map function shall be to use an unlimited number of layered maps and to easily drag-and-drop and point-and-click icons representing cameras, servers, microphones, speakers, I/O devices, connection areas (to quickly move from one map layer to another), and presets to maps.

d. The map function shall show a video preview of the relevant camera at mouse over



e. The map function shall support an integrated control Alarm management feature

The DVMS shall support an alarm management feature which shall be a single-point alarm function that shall be integrated with the map function and provide a clear and consolidated list and overview of security and system-related alarms and give instant access to cameras. In the management client, the alarm management feature shall make it possible to:

• Set time profiles for alarms.

• Trigger alarms on events.

• Set an alarm description, work instructions and assign an initial owner of an alarm.

• Set a customizable alarms, priority levels, sound notifications, customizable alarm categories, alarm statuses, and customizable codes for how the alarm was resolved.

• View triggered alarms.

• Manage alarms (reassign, change status, comment, set category, status and result code).

• Show up to 15 related cameras in an alarm preview window.

• View alarm handling reports

• View alarm logs

• In the full viewing client, the alarm management feature shall make it possible to:

• See an alarm list in live and playback views

• Use extensive sort and filtering functions

• See instant preview of primary camera and related cameras

• Manage alarms (reassign, change status, comment)

• Integrate with map function

• See an alarm description and work instructions

• Perform escalation and forwarding handling

• Print alarm report

• See alarm location maps in alarm list

• Have combined access to live and playback video

• See a report of alarm handling

• Use a dedicated alarm management tab that can be displayed as floating window.

Privacy masking a. The management client shall allow an administrator to define privacy masks, where

areas of a camera image can be blocked from a view in clients as well as in exported video material.

b. Privacy masks shall be indicated through a black blurring of the selected area, hiding the selected area(s) in the view in clients.

Camera navigation feature a. A camera navigation feature shall make it possible to drag multi-level maps with

cameras onto live view. This shall automatically display the positions of defined cameras in relation to each other based upon map data, for example as cameras are laid out in a floor plan either in relation to each other or relative to the current view.

b.



Integration platform (software development kit SDK) for third-party application integration c. The software solution shall support a software development kit (SDK) that shall

allow for integrating the DVMS with third-party applications, d. Integration of third-party developed applications and plug-ins shall be possible in

three different ways: protocol integration, component integration and plug-in integration.

e. Integration through protocol shall allow for the possibility to choose coding platform. f. Integration through component integration shall allow for using software

components to integrate with the DVMS. g. Integration through a plug-in embedded directly into the DVMS environment shall

run as part of the software solution and client applications. Built-in de-warping lens support for 180° and 360° views

a. The software solution shall support the use of 360° panomorph video technology

and it shall be possible to define the physical location of such a hardware device, for example on a wall, the ground or in the ceiling.

Export

1. The software solution shall have an export function that shall make it possible to

export still images and video files from the DVMS to external sources. 2. The software solution shall include a storyboard export feature in which several

small clips with individual timespan shall be included in one export. 3. The software solution shall make it possible to estimate the size of an export once

the export has been initiated. 4. The export function shall support the following functionality:

• Export in still image Format (JPEG)

• Export in media player format (AVI) (with or without audio)

• Export in proprietary database format

• Encrypted export with password

• Auto-export of standalone viewing client

• Prevention of re-export of an exported file

• Additional export-specific privacy masks

• Direct export to optical media

• Flexible camera selection for export

• Bulk export to multiple media formats

• General and camera specific export comments

• Pre/post comment slides for AVI files

• Verification of digital signatures in the standalone viewing client. Storage

1. Archiving of recorded video a. The software solution shall support archiving (an automatic transfer) of recordings

(archives) from a camera’s live database location to another location on a time-schedule, without the need for user action, or initiation of the archiving process.

b. The DVMS shall make it possible to define and configure a storage container wherein archives shall be possible to archive again and again to new locations. The live database shall automatically be divided into one hour segments, keeping the



size of the open live databases as small as possible. This shall ensure that a potential database repair after a failure will be as short as possible.

c. The DVMS shall make it possible to select a storage container for each device and move a device from one storage container to another. It shall be possible to move all unarchived recordings or to keep them in the old location.

d. The DVMS shall make it possible to set a retention time that shall define how long recordings should stay in an archive before being deleted or archived.

e. The DVMS shall provide an overview of the defined storage containers, their archives with path, and free and used space on the drives for each device, including the used storage space in the recording database, and in archives.

f. Archives shall be located on either the recording server computer or on a connected network drive. If the storage container on a network drive becomes unavailable for recording, the system shall be able to trigger actions such as automatic e-mails to defined personnel.

g. The DVMS shall make it possible to access all recordings for playback, whether the recordings are archived or not.

h. The DVMS shall make it possible for archiving and recording processes to take place at the same time, which shall enable recording to continue when the software solution is archiving databases.

The DVMS shall make it possible archive at a particular point in time, up to 24 times a day, with a minimum of one hour between each, in order to prevent that a camera database becomes full. Recordings shall be archived automatically if a camera’s database is full. It shall be possible to use network drives such as NAS, DAS as an archiving location. Encryption of recorded video

a. The software solution shall enable 56-bit DEA encryption on recordings and

archives. The encryption shall also be kept even if the recordings are groomed during the archiving process.

b. The software solution shall support 56-bit DEA encryption and 128-, 192- and 256-bit AES encryption of video for export purposes.

Digital signing of recorded video

a. The software solution shall support digital signing of recordings on the recording

server. b. The software solution shall make it possible to include the existing digital signature

made when the video originally was recorded and, in addition to this, support adding a digital export signature.

c. The standalone viewing client shall be able to verify that the contents of viewed databases have not been tampered with and that no database files have been removed.

Integration

Application programming interface (API) a. The SDK shall offer an API for access to the entire DVMS. Client plug-in support



a. The full viewing client and the management client shall be able to extend standard functionality through third-party plugins that enable support for access control or other functionality.

Open integration platform and/or software development kit a. The SDK shall allow third-party development of functionality to integrate with the

DVMS through open platform integration. Generic and user-defined events via TCP/IP

a. The software solution shall be able to trigger events when receiving specific data

sent via TCP/IP. Configuration API

a. The SDK shall allow external systems to make change to the system configuration

and to manage settings related to camera configuration in the video system from external business systems and applications.

Management Centralized management a. All aspects of system management shall be managed through a unified

management client.

Tiered administrator rights for system administrators a. The software solution shall make it possible to for a system administrator with full

system rights to assign partial management permissions to other system administrators.

Device group support a. Device groups shall make it possible to specify common properties for all device

types in a common device group. b. Device groups shall make it possible to specify rules to perform actions on a group

of devices. c. Device groups shall make it possible to set user rights on a group of devices. Customizable management client user interface (profiles)

a. The software solution shall make it possible for system administrators to customize

the management client’s user interface so features and functions that should not be available to select users of the management client are removed.

Customizable full viewing client user interface (profiles)

a. The software solution shall make it possible for system administrators to customize

the full viewing client’s user interface so features and functions that should not be available to select users of the full viewing client are removed.



Dual authorization The software solution shall support setting up a feature to require two people to sign in at the same time before access to the management client or full viewing client is possible. System monitoring a. The system monitoring feature shall make it possible to view system information

and create reports on: 1) Management servers (show CPU and memory usage) 2) Recording server (show CPU and memory usage and usage data for

disks, storage, networks and cameras) 3) Failover servers (show CPU and memory usage) 4) Additional servers (show CPU and memory usage on log servers,

events servers, and so on. 5) Cameras (such as camera status, if the individual camera is recording,

the recording server the camera is connected to and more) 6) To empower system administrators to pro-active maintain their video

surveillance installation, DVMS includes an extension of the System Monitoring function. The new customizable dashboard gives the system administrators a real-time at-the-glance overview of system status, and allows them to do instant drilldown for first level root-cause analysis. The extended System Monitor also includes:

i. Warning/alarm thresholds per object type and individual objects ii. Predictive video retention warning iii. E-mail, alarm and Customer Dashboard notification

Time schedule-controlled user access to devices and functions

a. The software solution shall make it possible to set a time profile on a role that shall

only give access to various functionalities within a specific period of time. Day length time profile

a. The software solution shall make it possible via GPS coordinates to set day length

time profile that adjusts sunrise and sunset time as well as daylight saving time for cameras placed outside in areas where the day length changes throughout the year.

On-the-fly configuration changes a. All changes made to the system shall take place without interruption of live and

recorded video and without restarting system components. Configuration reports

a. The software solution shall support a functionality to generate a PDF that shall

document all parts of the system configuration, including preview of video.

Automatic device scanning with automatic device model detection

a. The software solution shall be able to scan a network for hardware device and list these in real-time as they are detected.

b. The software solution shall be able to recognize relevant hardware devices, such as cameras and video encoders, and include them in the device scanning process.



Device replacement wizard

a. A device replacement wizard shall make it possible to replace an already added and configured hardware device with a new hardware device.

Run servers as Windows Services

a. The software solution shall run the recording server, mobile server and event server

as Windows Services.

Scheduled start/stop of devices The software solution shall have the possibility to schedule or create an event that shall make it possible to set when a device shall be on/off. Control recording of devices related to cameras

a. The software solution shall include a feature to enable recording of camera-related

audio or metadata when the camera is recording Detect deviation from defined storage policies

b. The software solution shall include a storage event that shall make it possible to detect deviation from defined storage policies in situations where video data is overwritten or deleted prematurely due to insufficient physical storage.

Manual backup and restore of configuration data a. The software solution shall be able to manually backup and restore configuration

data. Online and Offline activation

a. The software solution shall support activation of license files via offline

activation. b. The software solution shall support activation of license files online. The registered

user shall be able to do this in the machine with Internet facility [Optional]

Federated architecture

The federated architecture shall allow an administrator to build a hierarchy consisting of two or more independent DVMS linked together. 2. Each individual site in the federated hierarchy shall be a complete high-end DVMS. 3. The individual DVMS added to the federated hierarchy shall be individually

manageable. 4. The federated architecture shall have no limitation to the number of sites that can be

added. 5. The federated architecture shall not require extra servers on each federated site to

be part of the federated hierarchy neither should it require servers nor components working as gateways to handle multicast traffic.

6. The federated architecture shall allow the use of standard TCP/IP unicast traffic with no requirements for special features in network equipment: routers, switches, ADSL, fiber connections etc.



7. The federated architecture shall allow standard methods for implementing network redundancy to be used, minimizing the risk of losing network connection to the different sites in the hierarchy.

8. The federated architecture shall allow local administrators and users to login locally, view video and manage the site in the event that the network connection to the federated hierarchy is broken

9. The federated architecture shall allow global users in the hierarchy to login and access cameras from all other sites in the hierarchy that still are online if the connection to a site in the hierarchy is lost.

10. The federated architecture shall be based on the user rights on each system and allow the user to access video, audio and other resources across all individual sites in the hierarchy. Users shall also have access to all sites in the federated hierarchy, and administrators shall have access to remote management of all sites from only one login, which shall be based on administration rights on the individual systems.

• The federated architecture shall allow a federated site to have maximum one parent site and unlimited children sites.

• The federated architecture shall allow central handling of alarms from all sites in the hierarchy in a unified alarm interface.

• The federated architecture must not require additional licenses as long as all sites are owned by the same legal entity.

• Deployment of the federated architecture between two or more video management systems owned by different legal entities shall be subject to the following licensing:

a. Each legal entity must have a Software License Code (SLC) for the video

management system and device licenses for all the cameras in the respective system.

On the federating site, a federated architecture device license for the video management system shall be required for each camera that shall be accessible on the federated site. 1. It shall be possible to use distributed domain architecture in case it must be

possible for users to login on individual sites when connection to the main controller is broken.

2. Seamless management of multisite and federated installations running different software generations. Management Client should be backward compatible with earlier version.

Interconnected systems 1. The DVMS shall connect the high-end DVMS with most other DVMS versions made

by the software manufacturer through interconnected systems functionality. 2. The interconnected system functionality shall make it possible to have a central site

for surveillance monitoring and evidence handling that shall operate geographically scattered remote sites.

3. The remote site shall connect to the central site through a designated device driver, as a multi-channel video encoder with edge storage support. Cameras from the remote site shall provide the same access to live and playback of video on the central site as cameras connected directly to the central site.

4. The remote site using the interconnected systems functionality shall operate as a full and separate DVMS system.

5. The interconnected systems feature shall allow the following settings for recording:

• Recording on the remote site only, this shall keep all recording and playback locally on the remote site. No recording shall be done on the



central site, however it shall be possible to view live and recorded video and audio from the central site.

• Recording on the central site only, this shall stream all video and audio from the remote site to the central site, at which all recordings of video shall take place. It shall not be possible to play back recordings on the remote site, however operators of the central site shall be able to view live and recorded video and audio.

• Recording on both the remote site and the central site, which shall record video on both the central and remote site. It shall be possible to schedule recordings, create an event or through an operator request to transfer (copy) video from the remote site to the central site. This shall make it possible to transfer all or selected recordings from the remote site to the central site at a later time in case the connection between the central and the remote sites are broken.

6. In the full viewing client on the central site, it shall be possible to retrieve recordings from remote sites through rules set up in the DVMS.

7. The interconnected systems functionality shall require that a role is set up and assigned to have access to functions on cameras from remote sites.

8. The interconnected systems feature shall make it possible to transfer recordings from mobile means of transportation with surveillance that are not always connected to a network, for example busses, trains, ferries, once the mobile vehicle/boat connects to the network to which the central site is connected. It shall be possible to request recordings from the vehicle or boat, which shall then be transferred to the central site once the vehicle or boat is connected to the central site’s network.

9. The DVMS shall require a dedicated device license for each interconnected camera that is enabled on the central site. If a camera is disabled from the central site, it shall not take up a camera license until it is enabled again.

Logging 1. The software solution shall provide the following logs:

a. System logs b. Audit logs c. Rule logs

Viewing clients The basic functionality of the full viewing client and the web viewing client . Hardware Compliance (To be necessarily Filled in By Bidders) Cameras

Description

Compliance

1.

IP varifocal Dome Day/Night Very High Resolution (2MP or above) WDR Indoor Camera

1/3" 2MP Progressive CMOS

Wide Dynamic range should be120dB or above

Color mode: 0.15 Lux (30IRE)

Black & white mode: 0Lux (IR LED on)

2.8 ~ 12 mm (4.3x) motorized varifocal, Auto Iris lens



Field View H: 109.7° ~ 26.0° / V: 60.8° ~ 15. 2° / D: 131.3° ~ 30.1°

0° ~ 350° / 0° ~ 67°

Automatic Gain Control, BLC, White balance: On/Off

3D Noise reduction: ON/Off

Tamper Detection: On/Off


Max Resolution : 1920 X 1080@25fps

Built-in Multi-zone motion detection

Unicast, Multicast, RTP, TCP, UDP, HTTP, IGMP, ICMP, DHCP, DNS


S/N Ratio: 2D and 3D digital noise reduction


Built in Micro SD cared slot to support up to 128GB storage for local recording

At least one potential free Alarm IN and one Alarm out

Privacy masking zones


Operating Temp: -10° C to 55° C (14° F to 131° F)

Humidity : 90% (Non-condensing

UL,CE and FCC certified

ONVIF Compliance

Warranty: Minimum 3 years from OEM


2. IP varifocal Bullet Day/Night Very High Resolution (2MP or above) WDR

Privacy Mask Zones: Required

Unicast, Multicast, RTP, TCP, UDP, HTTP, IGMP, ICMP, DHCP etc. as per system requirement



S/N Ratio: >50db


H.265, MJPEG/Multiple streaming

Built in Micro SD cared slot to support up to 128GB storage for local recording

Alarm I/O :Input 1 / Output 1


Ingress Protection :IP66 Mechanical (Vandal) Protection :IK10

Operating Temp :30° C to 55° C (-22° F to 131° F)

Humidity : 90% (Non-condensing)




IP CCTV Storage Calculation

( TO BE MANDATORILY FILLED IN BY BIDDERS TO ESTABLISH RECORDING STORAGE REQUIREMENT)

Sr

Type

of C

am

era

No

. o

f C

am

era

s

Loca

tion

Co

mp

ressio

n

Sta

nd

ard

Re

solu

tion

fo

r

Vie

win

g

Re

solu

tion

fo

r

Re

cord

ing

F

ram

e r

ate

fo

r

Re

cord

ing

Ave

rag

e H

ours

of

day r

ecord

ing

(Motio

n b

ase

d)

Re

sulta

nt

Ima

ge

Siz

e

Re

sulta

nt

Ba

nd

wid

th

Re

qu

ire

me

nt

per

ca

me

ra

Ba

nd

wid

th

for

all

Ca

me

ras

Tota

l S

tora

ge

Re

qu

ire

me

nt fo

r

1 D

ay fo

r 1

ca

me

ra

Tota

l S

tora

ge

Re

qu

ire

me

nt fo

r

90 D

ays

1

Indo

or

Do

me

Va

rifo

ca

l

2nd &

3rd F

loor

,

Critica

l A

rea

H.2

65

2 M

P

720

p

25

4

2

Indo

or

Bu

llet

Va

rifo

ca

l

2nd &

3rd F

loor

,

Critica

l A

rea

H.2

65

2 M

P

720

p

25

4

Networking Hardware : Switches - 24 port Gigabit switch stackable PoE with additional 4 SFP ports (Layer3)

Sr No

Technical Specifications

Vendor to specify values, make, model offered

1 Switch Architecture

1.1 The Switch should have at least 24 10/100/1000 Line Rate for 64byte Packets

1.2 The Switch should support 4 combo port or 4 x 10G.

1.3 The Switch should support Redundant Power Supplies.

1.4 The Switch should have RJ45 & Mini USB Console Ports for Management.

1.5 The Switch should have USB for OS Management (uploading, downloading & booting of OS and Configuration).



1.6 The Switch should have atleast 256 MB of Flash for storing OS and other Logs.

1.7 The Switch should have atleast 256 MB of DRAM.

1.8 The Switch should have PoE Budget as30W per port

1.9 The Switch should have atleast 1 10/100/1000 dedicated Ethernet Management Port.

1.10 The Switch should have power savings mechanism wherein it should reduce the power consumption on ports not being used.

1.11 The Switch should be Rack Mountable and should not take space more than 1RU.

1.12 The Switch should support operating temperature from 0°to 45°C.

1.13 The Switch should support operating relative humidity 15% to 90% noncondensing.

2 Switch Performance

2.1 The Switch should have atleast 128Gbps nonblocking switching bandwidth.

2.2 The Switch should have atleast 95Mpps of forwarding rate.

2.3 The Switch should support atleast 16000 MAC Addresses.

2.4 The Switch should support atleast 10000 IPv4 routes.

2.5 The Switch should support atleast 4000 VLAN IDs & 1000 SVI’s.

2.6 The Switch should support 9198 bytes of Jumbo Frames.

2.7 The Switch should support Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) of 9198 bytes.

3 Stacking

3.1 The Switch architecture should be able to stack atleast 8 units of switches in stack

3.2 The Switch stack should be based on Distributed forwarding Architecture, where in each stack member forwards its own information on network.

3.3 The Switch stack architecture should have centralized control and Management plane with Active Switch and all the information should be Synchronized with Standby Switch.

3.4 The Switch stack architecture should be Plug & Play for attaching or removing any switch from the stack without any downtime.

3.5 The Switch stacking should support 40 Gbps of throughput.

3.6 The Switch stacking should support single IP address management for the group of switches.

4 Layer 3 Features

4.1 The Switch should support IPv6 Routing capable protocols such as OSPFv3 in hardware.

4.2 Left blank

4.3 The Switch should support IPv6 Multicast Routing.



4.4 The Switch should support basic IP Unicast routing protocols (static, RIPv1 & RIPv2).

4.5 The Switch should support IPv6 & IPv4 Policy Based Routing

4.6 The Switch should support Inter-VLAN routing.

4.7 The Switch should support VRRPv3.

5 Layer 2 Features

5.1

The Switch should be able to discover (on both IPv4 & IPv6 Network) the neighboring device giving the details about the platform, IP Address, Link connected through etc, thus helping in troubleshooting connectivity problems.

5.2 The Switch should support Detection of Unidirectional Links (in case of fiber cut) and to disable them to avoid problems such as spanning-tree loops.

5.3 The Switch should support centralized VLAN Management, VLANs created on the core switch should be propagated automatically.

5.4 The Switch should support 802.1d, 802.1s, 802.1w Spanning-Tree & its enhancement for fast convergence.

5.5 The Switch should support 802.1q VLAN encapsulation.

5.6 The Switch should support 802.3ad (LACP) to combine multiple network links for increasing throughput and providing redundancy.

6 Network Security Features

6.1 The Switch should have Port security to secure the access to an access or trunk port based on MAC address to limit the number of learned MAC addresses to deny MAC address flooding.

6.2 The Switch should support DHCP snooping to prevent malicious users from spoofing a DHCP server and sending out rougue addresses.

6.3

The Switch should support Reverse Path Forwarding (RPF) feature to mitigate problems caused by the introduction of malformed or forged (spoofed) IP source addresses into a network by discarding IP packets that lack a verifiable IP source address.

6.4 The Switch should support flexible & multiple authentication mechanism, including 802.1X, MAC authentication bypass, and web authentication using a single, consistent configuration.

6.5 The Switch should support RADIUS change of authorization and downloadable Access List for comprehensive policy management capabilities.

6.6 The Switch should support MAC address notification to allow administrators to be notified of users added to or removed from the network.

6.7 The Switch should support IGMP filtering to provide multicast authentication by filtering out nonsubscribers and limits the number of concurrent multicast streams available per port.

6.8 The Switch should support VLAN ACLs on all VLANs prevent unauthorized data flows from being bridged within VLANs.



6.9 The Switch should support IPv6 ACLs that can be applied to filter IPv6 traffic.

6.10 The Switch should support Port-based ACLs for Layer 2 interfaces to allow security policies to be applied on individual switch ports.

6.11

The Switch should support Secure Shell (SSH) Protocol, and Simple Network Management Protocol Version 3 (SNMPv3) to provide network security by encrypting administrator traffic during Telnet and SNMP sessions.

6.12 The Switch should support TACACS and RADIUS authentication to facilitate centralized control of the switch and restricts unauthorized users from altering the configuration.

6.13 The Switch should support Multilevel security on console access to prevent unauthorized users from altering the switch configuration.

7 Quality of Service (QoS) & Control

7.1 The Switch should be capable of Downloading Downloadable Access List from network security engine based on user identity.

7.2

The Switch should support 802.1p CoS and DSCP Field classification using marking and reclassification on a per-packet basis by source and destination IP address, MAC address, or Layer 4 Transmission Control Protocol/User Datagram Protocol (TCP/UDP) port number.

7.3 The Switch should support 6 MB of buffers on the 24 port model.

8 Application Visibility

8.1 The Switch should be capable of enabling feature on all ports of the switch for Ingress and Egress Traffic.

8.2 The Switches when stacked together should be capable to exporting the flow independently / directly to the Collector.

8.3 The Switch should be capable of monitoring network traffic on Physical, VLAN.

9 Services

9.1 The Switch should be capable of measuring user traffic performance and generating alerts (based on thresholds) and reports.

10 Standards & Compliance (Switch Should support all the mentioned Standards)

10.1 IEEE 802.1s

10.2 IEEE 802.1w

10.3 IEEE 802.1x

10.4 IEEE 802.3ad

10.5 IEEE 802.3x full duplex on 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T ports

10.6 SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3



24 port Gigabit switch stackable PoE with additional 4 SFP ports (Layer2)

Sr. No.

Specifications Compliance

1 Connectivity

1.1 10/100/1000Base-T- 24 Ports

1.2 4 SFP slot 1000Base-SFP

2 Performance

2.1 FLASH 32mb

2.2 DRAM 128mb

2.3 Switch fabric speed,Gbps-56

2.4 Forwarding Rate (Mpps)-42

2.5 Packet buffer,Bytes-1.5M

2.6 Jumbo Frame-12K

2.7 MAC address Table-16K shared

3 Resilience and availability

3.1 IEEE 802.1D STP/802.1w RSTP/802.1s MSTP

3.2 IEEE 802.3ad LACP(max # trunks/links per trunk) 16/8

3.3 LLDP

3.4 Loop guard

4 Traffic control

4.1 802.1Q VLANs-4K

4.2 Port-based VLAN

4.3 Protocol-based VLAN

4.4 IP subnet based VLAN

4.5 Voice VLAN

4.6 Mac VLAN

4.7 GVRP

4.8 802.1ad Vlan Stacking (QinQ)

4.9 Selective QinQ

5 Security

5.1 Layer 2 MAC filtering

5.2 BPDU Tunnel

5.3 Login authentication and authorization by RADIUS and TACACS+

5.4 TACACS+ accounting/ auditing

5.5 SSH v1/v2

5.6 DHCP/DHCPv6 snooping

5.7 IP/IPv6 Source Guard

5.8 port security

6 Quality of Service

6.1 802.1p Priority Queues per Port-8

6.2 802.1p Queuing method

6.3 Trusted COS/TOS/IP Precedence/DSCP/Port

6.4 Broadcast Storm Control

6.5 Rate Limiting, port based

6.6 Queuing method( SP/WRR/ SP +WRR)



7 Layer 2 & Layer 3 Multicast

7.1 Multicast VLAN

7.2 IGMP Query

7.3 IGMP Snooping (v1,v2,v3)

7.4 IPv6 MLD v1/v2 Snooping

8 Layer 3 IPv6

8.1 IPv4/IPv6 Dual Protocol Stack

8.2 IPv6 address

9 Manageability

9.1 Console Port

9.2 Web Interface

9.3 Management through console, telnet, SNMP

9.4 TFTP/FTP

9.5 Configuration backup and restore

9.6 DHCP Client/Relay/Server

9.7 DHCP option 43/60/82

9.8 DHCPv6 option37/38

9.9 DHCPv6 Relay/Server

9. 10 NTP

9.11 Port Mirroring

9.12 RSPAN

9.13 OAM EFM/CFM

10 Physical

10.1 Dimensions (Width x Height x Depth) 442mm x 43.6mm x 220mm

10.2 Operating Temperature-0℃ ~ 50℃

10.3 Power Supply-AC

11 Electrical

11.1 Maximum Power Consumption, Watts-20W



ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Doors for all Critical Areas such as Server Rack Area, MUX Room, Communication rooms, telecom rooms, UPS room, Battery Rooms etc are provided with Biometric fingerprint cum Smart Readers for Entry; and Smart reader for Exit. Doors for all Non-Critical Areas are provided with Smart Readers for Entry; and Smart Card Reader for Exit. This document is intended to specify the requirements for the provision of all equipment, materials, labour, documentation and services necessary to furnish and install a complete and operational Integrated Security Access Control and Alarm Monitoring System. The system shall consist of a fully automated and integrated Security System, including, but not limited to the following functions and capabilities:

• Automated Card Access Control at designated areas and doors.

• Integrated Visitor Management System for visitor’s database integration, storage and reporting.

• Direct Data Interface to an IP Video CCTV Subsystem to provide automatic camera call up and pre-sets as well as scene display through the use of a graphical user interface and simple point and click action; as also for event storage with Picture clip for further analysis and reports.

• Configuration of the Access control system with Main and Parallel Redundant Servers, with the Main servers kept at the BMS Equipment Room on the 2nd/3rd Floor, and the Parallel Redundant Servers kept on the 3rd/2nd Floor Redundant BMS Equipment Room.

• The system equipment and installation shall comply with all provisions and requirements of this specification as well as any and all applicable national, state and local codes and standards.

GLOSSARY OF TERMS & ABBREVIATIONS ACS Access Control System, incorporates the entire access control and security

network, including the Server, Workstations and Intelligent field or system controllers.

ISC (Intelligent System Controller). The hardware components of the system to which

the physical components (input devices, entry devices, and output devices) of the access control system connect. The ISC communicates with the ASC Server.

MMI Man Machine Interface. Also known as the Graphical User Interface (GUI).

NIC Network Interface Card.

DRIM Dual Reader Interface Module

SRIM Single Reader Interface Module

GEM Graphics Editing Module (GEM)Compliance & Standards



• The Intelligent System Controllers (ISC's) shall comply with at least two standards from the following compliance regulations:

▪ CE ▪ C-Tick ▪ UL

• The purpose of these regulations is to maximise the operational useability of the product and to ensure minimum standards within the access control system development have been maintained. These standards will also ensure electromagnetic interference between electronic products are minimized as these may diminish the performance of electrical products or disrupt essential communications.

INSTALLATION

• The ACS shall be designed, installed, commissioned and serviced by manufacturer employed, factory trained personnel.

• All materials supplied by the Vendor shall be new and shall comply with the latest published specifications and recommendations of the manufacturer in all respects unless otherwise indicated. The Vendor shall supply the latest model available for all equipment items. Unless otherwise indicated in the specification, all electronic equipment shall be a standard, unmodified production model.

• Equivalent products will not be substituted for approved products. All equipment must reflect a complete description of the proposed equipment, including manufacturer's technical descriptions, drawings and technical performance.

• The Vendor shall be responsible for providing complete and operational subsystems, including but not limited to all hardware, software, wire, cable, conduit and boxes, power circuit connections, terminal blocks, labour, management, engineering, training, testing, relocation adjusting and connection to NIC work and devices.

System Requirements System Architecture

▪ The system shall be of a Server / Client architecture with the option to configure the Server and client ACS software on different PCs residing on the same computer network. Full network functionality shall be available over remote links between the Server and any workstation, using the following protocols:

• NetBEUI, IPX/SPX, TCP/IP

▪ Encryption between the Server and each Client is configurable and safeguarded using IPSec, to ensure the integrity and security of the data transferred.

Server The ACS Server shall be capable of operating on an IBM compatible computer with the following minimum system requirements: "Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of Central Server for loading Access Management software-ACS (Primary) • DUAL CPU, E5-2603 ( 1.6 GHZ , 6 CORE)



• 16 GB RAM • 4 x 500 GB (or above) 10K RPM (RAID 1) HDD - OS/ Application • Windows server 2012 64 bit • SQL server 2012 • Standard mouse, keyboard, video card and colour monitor • Ports At least one network connection (as outlined above) "Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of Central Server for loading Access Management software-ACS (Redundant) • DUAL CPU, E5-2603 ( 1.6 GHZ , 6 CORE) • 16 GB RAM • 4 x 500 GB (or above) 10K RPM (RAID 1) HDD - OS/ Application • Windows server 2012 64 bit • SQL server 2012 • Standard mouse, keyboard, video card and colour monitor • Ports At least one network connection (as outlined above) " Workstation Workstations(for card enrolment) shall be capable of operating on an IBM compatible computer with the following minimum system requirements: (2 Set)

• Operating System Windows 10

• Processor Intel i5 or higher

• RAM 8 GB

• Hard Drive 500 GB or higher

• Monitor SVGA or better

• Ports At least one network connection port to the Server PC.

• Standard mouse, keyboard, video card and colour monitor

• Web Camera for Photo capturing

• Finger Print Scanner - ISO 19794(2) & ISO 19794(4) Compliant Intelligent System Controllers The system shall be configured with the ACS software connected via an Ethernet link to any configurable number of Intelligent System Controllers. Distributed intelligence

The system shall employ a distributed architecture so that all access decisions are made locally at the Intelligent System Controller (ISC). All decisions to grant access shall be made by the local ISC.

An Intelligent System Controller (ISC) shall link the ACS software to all other field hardware. It shall provide full distributed processing for access control and alarm monitoring operations. Access levels, hardware configurations and programmed alarm outputs assigned at the administrative workstation shall be downloaded immediately to the ACS software. All access granted/denied decisions shall be made at the ISC to provide fast responses to card reader transactions.



The ISC shall be required to operate in a stand-alone and peer-to-peer mode in the event it loses communication with system software. It shall continue to make access granted/denied decisions and maintain a log of events. Events shall be stored in local memory, and then uploaded automatically to the system when communications are restored.

Furthermore, an individual ISC shall be able to communicate with another ISC to distribute cardholder locations and to perform scheduled and alarm events.

Ethernet Communications

The ISC shall communicate with the ACS via any standard WAN / LAN communications link. The ISC shall provide integrated onboard port for direct Ethernet connection. This connection shall not be an RS-485 communications channel that has simply been converted into an Ethernet connection using a “Terminal Server” or similar conversion device.

The ISC shall be IP addressable and support standard TCP/IP transmission.

Internal Memory

The ISCs will be supplied complete with internal non-volatile memory. This memory will allow all program, access permissions, time schedules and the current date and time data stored in the ISC memory to be retained during periods of power failure. The purpose is to ensure the ISC returns to full operation after the event of absolute power failure. In addition, the ISC memory will not require the connection of a battery to permanently store system information.

Expandable Memory

The ISCs will support the installation of an expandable memory card. This memory card will be used to increase the overall capacity of the ISC and allow the backup of programmed and transaction data locally for recovery immediately following a power failure.

Local Alarm Input and Output

The ISC shall support the onboard direct connection of a tamper input. This input connection shall be reserved for connecting a tamper switch of the equipment cabinet in which the ISC has been installed.

Upon the Tamper input being triggered the ISC shall also provide a local output that is capable of connecting an output device that can be triggered as a result of cabinet tempering.

LED diagnostics

As a minimum the ISC shall provide at least 6 separate LEDs that can be easily viewed for diagnostic purposes. These LEDs shall indicate the state of power and communications at any given time.

Auto Discovery

It shall be possible for the ICS to automatically discover all ISCs connected to the same Ethernet network. As a minimum the auto discovery will provide the following:



Automatically discover installed ISCs

Pre-programme ISCs in the ACS database

Allow basic configuration of ISCs

Dual Reader Interface Module

A Dual Reader Interface Module (DRIM) shall be available for each controlled door and provide the ability to connect up to two card readers or entry devices. This DRIM shall:

Monitor the door position (door contact)

Allow the connection of a Request-to-Exit (REX) switch for exit

Control an electric door lock or strike

Provide the facility for up to 3 auxiliary input devices to be connected

Allow the connection of an alarm buzzer that can be triggered in the case of an alarm event, or more specifically locally trigger a buzzer for a door held event before this alarm is registered at the host.

All events that occur at the door must be reported from the DRIM to the ISC. To allow for situations where an entry and exit reader may be required at the one door a DRIM will allow two readers to be connected. However, in circumstances where a door shall only require one reader the DRIM can be configured to operate in a two door mode, whereby a reader, door lock and door monitoring device can be connected for each door. In addition, the DRIM shall also provide connection for single advanced reader that connects via an RS-485 or Wiegand / Clock/Data connections. Finally, the DRIM shall also provide the ability to work offline in cases where communications with ISC has have been lost and still continue to accept a set of specified cards as being valid to the door(s) which it controls. Eight Reader Interface Module An Eight Reader Interface Module (ERIM) shall be available for each controlled door and provide the ability to connect up to eight separate card readers or entry devices. This ERIM shall:

Monitor the door position (door contact) for each door

Allow the connection of a Request-to-Exit (REX) switch for each exit

Control an electric door lock or strike for each door

Provide the facility for up to 16 auxiliary input devices to be connected

Allow the connection of an alarm buzzer that can be triggered in the case of an alarm event, or more specifically locally trigger a buzzer for a door held event before this alarm is registered at the host.

All events that occur at any door must be reported from the ERIM to the ISC. To allow for situations where an entry and exit readers may be required at a door the ERIM will allow two readers to be used for single door control and provide the possibility to uses the following combinations of door control:

Eight single reader doors

Six single reader doors and one dual reader door

Four single reader doors and two dual reader doors



Two single reader doors and three dual reader doors

Four dual reader doors

The ERIM shall also provide connection for up to eight advanced readers that connect via an RS-485 or Wiegand / clock/data connection. The ERIM shall also provide emergency override that supports wire supervision, to ensure that false fire override conditions are not triggered. Input Control Module A hardware module shall be available to independently monitor up to 32 alarm input devices and report line fault conditions, alarm conditions, power failure and wire supervision. When an alarm input is activated, the condition shall be reported to the ISC and subsequently to the ACS host. The same module shall also provide the ability to connect up to four control devices and support emergency override capabilities. The emergency override shall additionally support wire supervision, to ensure that false fire override conditions are not triggered. Input / Output control module A hardware module shall be available to monitor up to 8 independent input devices and reports line fault conditions, alarm conditions, power failure, and wire supervision. When an alarm input is activated, the condition shall be reported to the ISC and subsequently to the ACS workstation. The same module shall also allow the control of up to 8 output devices that can be controlled via the change in state of an input (monitor point) or a command received from the ACS Server. These outputs shall support fire override operation. Remote Arming Terminal A hardware module shall be available to provide a facility for system users to turn on and off the alarm system manually. This device shall provide a keypad and LCD screen for the easy navigation of alarm areas and for feedback to the user of the status of any actions they take. The Remote arming terminal shall also be capable of producing an audible sound when the alarm is first turned on or entry to an alarmed area is made to warn the users that an alarm is about to be raised. Readers I-class Card Reader

• The Contact less Smart card reader shall provide authentication by reading the Card ID & controller will compare with database and actuating the barrier/turnstile.

• Surface mounting style 13.56 MHz contactless smart card readers suitable for minimal space mounting configurations.

• Contactless smart card readers shall comply with ISO 15693 and shall read credentials that comply with these standards.

• It shall be plug & Play type with suitable locking devices.



• It shall operate on its own. No software control is required for configuring the threshold sensitivity for readers

• The contactless smart card reader shall provide the ability to change operational features in the field through the use of a factory-programmed command card.

• Additionally, firmware may be updated by flashing the reader. Command card operational programming options shall include:

a. A 3x4 keypad which can provide supplemental PIN operation. The keypad shall provide the most popular industry formats including 4 bit or 8 bit bursts for every key press.

b. It shall be possible to exchange the smart card reader without needing to reprogram the control unit.

• The readers shall be powered by field panels/Controller itself. No external power supply should be used for powering the reader

• Card reader shall use 64-bit authentication keys to reduce the risk of compromised data or duplicate cards. The contactless smart card reader and cards shall require matching keys in order to function together. All RF data transmission between the card and the reader shall be encrypted, using a secure algorithm.

• It shall have a read range of 5 cm – 7.5 cm when used with the accepted compatible access card technology

• Each reader shall communicate directly back to the controller in a supervised mode.

• It shall be capable of providing a unique tone and/or tone sequences for various status conditions such as access granted, access denied, reader power up, etc., and clear visual status LED indication (multi color) shall be provided for various status conditions.

• It shall be able to read the smart card and send the data to the controller less than 500 ms.

• Reader shall flash the LED green momentarily and emit a short beep to indicate that a card was read.

• Verification Time should be < 1 second

• Wiegand Interface: Yes

• Reader Output format: Wiegand

• Date encryption Between card and reader: 64 –bit

• Enrolment time < 3 second

• Certification UL / CE/FCC / IP55



Biometric, Pin & card Reader (All in One Reader) ▪ CPU: ARM® Cortex™-A9 core 1GHz ▪ Linux Operating System ▪ 2.8” QVGA color Touch-screen ▪ Status Leds & Visual and tone alerts ▪ FBI PIV IQS certified optical Fake Finger fingerprint sensor and STQC certified. ▪ Contactless reader options: iClass®, /NFC ▪ Network/Communication: Ethernet (POE), RS485, USB (host & slave) Options:

Wi-Fi, (with license) ▪ Internal storage capacity: 512MB Flash, 512MB RAM

o 3000 user records (2 fingers + 1 duress each), extendable up to 10,000 (with licenses) in 1:N mode

o 250 000 user IDs in 1:1 mode o 1 Million transaction logs o Banned/Authorized user list

▪ Inputs/outputs: Wiegand In & Out (customizable up to 512 bits), Door Relay, 2 GPI, 2 GPO

▪ Power supply: 12V-24V DC, Power over Ethernet (PoE) option ▪ Tamper switches ▪ Operating conditions:

o Temperature: -20°C to 55°C o Humidity: 10% to 80% (non condensing)

▪ Weather Resistant (IP 65 rated) ▪ Mechanical protection IK08 ▪ Compact with slim-profile: HxWxD = 156*68*62 mm (6.14*2.68*2.44 inches) ▪ Replaceable back-up battery ▪ EMC/Safety standards: CE, CB, FCC, UL294, BIS ▪ RoHS, REACh and WEEE compliant

Diagnostics Each ISC and hardware module shall provide a series of visible Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) that display the status of the controller or module, and can be used as visual diagnostic indicators. As a minimum, the following diagnostic LEDs should be available:

• Communications

• Monitor point (input) status

• Control point (output) status

• Power Housings & equipment tamper switches All access control hardware components shall be housed in a lockable metal cabinet that is fitted with equipment tamper switches and meets the appropriate environmental requirements. The ISC shall allow the connection of equipment tamper switches to detect access to security equipment and shall consist of a spring loaded switch assembly. Any movement of the cabinet door shall cause the switch contacts to transfer. Tamper switches shall incorporate SPDT contacts and be mounted within each cabinet containing security equipment such that the switch cannot be disconnected or disabled from the cabinet exterior. Firmware Download



All access control hardware components shall be supported by a built in firmware download and configuration utility from the ACS. This utility shall be included within the MMI and not via an external dedicated tool only. COMMUNICATIONS The system shall use TCP/IP communications techniques over Ethernet, whilst employing proprietary communications protocols. The encryption between the ACS host and each ISC shall use implementation of the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) to encrypt all messages and ensure data security. ACS communications

▪ The connection between the ACS Server and each MMI workstation shall use standard Ethernet communications.

▪ The communications protocol to transfer messages to or from the ACS Server to any MMI workstation in the system shall be of a proprietary nature to the manufacturer providing the highest level of security.

▪ In addition, the communications protocol shall allow an encryption mechanism to be configured, that ensures the transfer of data cannot be interpreted.

ACS / ISC communications

▪ The connection between the ACS Host and the ISCs shall use standard Ethernet communications. All communications between the ISCs and sub-devices shall be based upon the standard RS485 transmission techniques using a proprietary protocol.

▪ The communications protocol to transfer messages to or from the ACS Host to any ISC in the system shall be of a proprietary nature to the manufacturer providing the highest level of security.

▪ In addition, the communications protocol shall incorporate an error checking routine that checks the integrity of the messages that are transferred on this line.

ISC communications

▪ The connection between an ISC and a series of entry devices using Reader Interface Modules (RIMs), or system extension boards shall use standard RS485 communications techniques. The communications protocol to transfer messages to or from the ISC to any connected device shall be of a proprietary nature to the manufacturer providing the highest level of security possible.

▪ In addition, the communications protocol shall incorporate an error checking routine that checks the integrity of the messages that are transferred on this line.

▪ Each ISC shall be capable of communicating with at least 96 of these devices at any one time, using four separate channels to co-ordinate the communications process and share the load across different channels.

MAN MACHINE INTERFACE (MMI)

As a minimum the ACS shall provide the ability to connect up to 140 workstations to the server. Each workstation shall have the capability of displaying an easy to use MMI, from which all system operation, including programming, control and operation can be accomplished. The MMI shall employ a standard Windows look and feel and provide both an intuitive menu and button driven navigation system.



On-line help The MMI shall provide a comprehensive on-line help system, which shall be available at anytime and from any screen. The help system shall describe the use of all system functions and provide a comprehensive glossary of terms. In addition, the help system shall provide the standard windows help contents listing, index listing and key word or phrase search functionality. Navigation The MMI shall use standard Windows controls, including:

• Mouse control

• Menu functionality

• Button navigation

• Keyboard equivalent mouse shortcuts Toolbar Customization The MMI shall use allow for the customisation of an operator specific toolbar. This shall provide the ability to create a custom toolbar that only includes those buttons (links to parts of the ACS) that are most commonly used or required for the operation of the system. In addition, the operator shall be able to display the look and feel of the toolbar buttons that allow them to perform tasks quickly and efficiently including the text size and placement and size and position of icons displayed. In addition, the MMI shall also provide the ability for custom toolbar buttons to be programmed. This customisation will permit the selection of a personalized icon and the ability to include a command to be performed when the button is clicked by an operator. Windows look and feel

▪ The MMI shall support a user friendly, Windows Graphical User Interface (GUI) that shall be intuitive. All messages and interface text shall be in English prose unless another language has been specified and installed. All functions shall be either keyboard or mouse driven to allow the System Operators to choose the method of navigating through the screens. In the alarm-monitoring module of the system software, all major functions (opening a door, acknowledging alarms, etc.) shall be accomplished using a minimum number of mouse clicks.

▪ The operator workstation interface software shall minimise operator training through the use of language prompting, on-line help, and industry standard PC application software.

Languages

▪ The system shall support the installation of multiple language versions.

▪ In addition, the manufacturer shall be able to provide the tools to translate the ACS into other languages as may be required.

Installation

The MMI and ACS shall use standard Windows installation processes and employ a software installation that is similar in look and feel to other Windows Vista applications.



The installation licensing shall allow for the selection of software installations that cater for the size and functionality of the facility at which the system is being installed. As a minimum the following package types should be available as default:

• Basic

• Intermediate

• Advanced System Operators

The system will only permit authorised operators, who have been given permissions to log on to the ACS at a workstation, to administer aspects of the system. The functionality available to these operators shall be fully configurable via the comprehensive partitioning architecture. Authentication The system shall request an operator’s user name and password before entry to the MMI is granted. The password must be fully encrypted on-screen to prevent it from being easily copied. The MMI will not be displayed until the identification of the operator has been verified and access to the ACS is granted. Authentication may be based on a pre-defined time schedule for certain groups of operators.

Authentication Rules

It shall be possible for the following configurable logon rules to apply to each account:

• Password age

• Password Length

• Logon retries

• Complexity

Finally, it may be possible for the operator to change their own password or for authentication to be performed using the standard Windows logon identification. Therefore the currently logged in Windows User’s details can be used to verify their permission to log into the ACS. Partitioning

➢ Operator specific password access protection shall be provided to allow the user/manager to limit workstation control, display and database manipulation capabilities as deemed appropriate for each user, based upon an assigned password. Operator privileges shall "follow" the operator to any workstation logged onto (an unlimited number of operator accounts shall be supported).

➢ The System shall employ an application partitioning design so that applications are broken into separate distinct programs capable of running independently to other System applications. Applications shall include, but not be limited to, alarm monitoring, system administration & configuration, cardholder management, graphics, ID card printing, and cardholder forms designing modules. Each client workstation shall have the ability to be installed with any combination of the above listed modular applications.

➢ The system shall allow partitioning to be assigned on the basis of the following conditions (as a minimum):



• Cardholders

• System Functions (minimum of 60 feature levels)

• Holidays

• ISCs

• Field Devices

• Custom Pages

• Time Schedules

• Site Plans

• Reports

➢ The system shall prevent the currently logged in operator from viewing the details, regarding any alarms triggered by a system component to which they have not been assigned privileges, including:

• Audit trail alarm entries

• Audit trail reports, which include alarm details

• Audible and visual alarm annunciation The alarm information associated with any system component to which an operator has been assigned privileges will be displayed.

➢ The system shall allow partitioning to be assigned on the basis of audit trail reports. The currently logged on operator shall only be able to create or run those reports to which they have been assigned privileges.

The system shall also prevent the currently logged in operator from printing reports that include those system components to which they have not been provided privileges. Privilege levels When assigning a function to an operator, the system shall allow the level of assignment to be specified. These levels include:

• Read only. This type of privilege level does not allow the operator to create or modify components in the specified area of the system. However, they are allowed to view those records.

• Modify. This type of privilege level does not allow the operator to create components in the specified area of the system. However, they are allowed to view and make modifications to existing records.

• Full. This type of privilege level allows the operator to create, modify and view components in the specified area of the system.

Operator profiles The ACS shall support multiple operator profiles such that preferences are retained for individual operators, irrespective of the workstation that they log onto. The display colours and data layout shall be configurable (and be saved) per operator. Operator journal A system operator journal shall be available to log important daily events. The operator is required to select a journal subject from a pre-defined list. The ACS shall allow an administrator to set the names to comprise this list of subjects. The system shall also allow all journal entries relating to a particular subject to be recalled and viewed on-screen, printed or both.



Workstation auto-lock All ACS workstations shall automatically lock if left idle for a configurable period of time - requiring the operator to identify him or herself by re-entering their password. The operator shall also have the capability of manually locking a workstation at any time. Any system initiated or manual workstation locks shall be logged in the ACS audit trail. Default Accounts At installation the ISC shall be automatically configured with default operator accounts. These accounts shall be defined in such away that they reflect the standard duties of different operators that can be expected to use the system. CARDHOLDERS The system shall include a cardholder management component that is integrated with the access control system. The system must support at least 500,000 cards – all of which are downloaded and retained in the memory of each ISC. This cardholder management functionality must allow the enrolment of cardholders into the database, capturing of images and import/export of employee data. This functionality shall also allow a system operator to assign or modify the access rights of any cardholder. Cardholder data As a minimum, the ACS shall allow up to 196 configurable fields to be customised by the system administrator to suit the needs of the facility owner. The system shall provide a Graphics Editing Module (GEM) that gives operators the ability to modify any standard field to customise the cardholder screens as desired. Once these fields have been defined, the ACS shall not permit these (database) fields to be changed. In addition it shall be possible to add cardholders to the database without assigning a card to that cardholder. Searching The system shall allow the search of all programmed cardholders, based on the criteria supplied by an operator. Operators shall only be able to search and retrieve cardholder records to which they have assigned privileges. The search criteria shall include any information that can be recorded against the cardholder and as a minimum include:

• Card number

• Name (first and / or last)

• Work Group [Department[

• Title

• Address

• Contact Numbers (phone, mobile)

• Payroll Number [PF Index No]

• Aadhar Card No

• Custom Cardholder Data Searching shall not only be limited to entire word matches. An operator may also search for cardholders by entering data that appears in the beginning of a word or string.



If more than one cardholder in the system meets the specified criteria, the operator shall be displayed a list of all matching records, from which they can select a particular record. When search results are returned, the operator shall be able to dynamically re-sort the information displayed so that appears in a useful order (for example, by last name). When selecting an individual record to expand, it shall be possible to keep the search dialog active so that other cardholder records can be opened at a later time if required. Cardholder images

➢ The ACS shall support the capturing of a high quality image of a cardholder from any workstation. The system operator shall have the option of capturing images in real-time or alternatively by importing an existing image.

➢ If capturing images in real-time, the operator shall be able to use an appropriate capture card or use a USB digital video camera. If cardholder images already exist, the operator shall be able to import images of all standard formats including jpg, bmp, gif, and tif

➢ The cardholder image shall be able to be recalled at any time from any workstation to verify the identity of any cardholder on the facility.

Cardholder Fingerprints

➢ The ACS shall support the capturing of high quality finger prints and encoding the finger print into the card during enrolment process that is native of ACS.

Also the ACS shall allow operators to capture and store the fingerprint to the ACS database. The fingerprints shall be captured using a biometric reader and an enrolment reader shall be used for fingerprint encoding. Cardholder Signatures

➢ The ACS shall support the capturing of cardholder signatures from any workstation. The system operator shall have the option of capturing signatures in real-time or alternatively by importing an existing signature.

➢ If capturing signature in real-time, the operator shall be able to use a USB signature capture pad. If cardholder signature already exists, the operator shall be able to import images of all standard formats including jpg, bmp, gif, and tif.

Card Trace The ACS shall record the last visited access point (with date and time) for every cardholder. A special trace function shall be available for operators to track activity of specific cardholders. When the trace has been applied, all card activity relating to that cardholder will be highlighted in the audit trail. A report may also be generated that details the locations visited by the traced cardholder. Grouping cardholders The ACS shall allow the grouping of cardholders into specific configurable entities. This shall facilitate voiding of a large number of cards with a single action and also assist with operator partitioning. Cardholder violations



The system shall monitor every card presented at each reader in the system and prevent access at the reader (door) if any of the following access violation conditions exist:

• The card has not been assigned access permission at the current time.

• The card has not been assigned permission at the reader.

• The cardholder has been voided in the system.

• The cardholder belongs to a group of cardholders that has been voided.

• Entry to or exit from an area governed by anti-passback control has been violated.

• A card belongs to a group of cards that has been disabled.

• A card was presented at a reader that has been disabled or taken out of service.

• The card has been presented before its allocated start date, or after the card’s designated end date.

• The card presented does not belong to the site, which includes an invalid card number, an invalid site number or a card containing an invalid facility code.

In addition, a message will be logged in the audit trail indicating the card use violation, and if configured, a visual and audible alarm will also be displayed.

Cardholder Data Import / Export

➢ The system shall provide an external software tool that can be used to import or export cardholder data from another application via text file.

This manipulation of data shall be governed by the same login rules applied to a standard operator of the system and shall also be capable of synchronising data over a period of time.

➢ The system shall also provide an automatic synchronization tool that allows changes to be automatically bought in the ACS. .

Cardholder Record Changes

It shall be possible to display all changes made to a cardholder record within a specified date range so that record can be reversed to a previous status from any point in time.

Inactive Cardholders

It shall be possible to effectively park cardholders by removing a card from their current identity profile. Whilst this data will still remain in the ACS the cardholder will still be considered inactive and not count toward any overall licensing structure or otherwise.

Custom Cardholder Information

▪ The ACS shall provide an integrated tool for creating custom cardholder information. This shall provide the ability to add the following information types to a cardholder custom page:

• Textbox

• Dropdown List Box

• Date Calendar

• Group Box



• Dialog Labels

• Custom Button

• Attachments Box

▪ In addition, design of custom pages shall be simple drag and drop functionality with automatic page guides for aligning already placed components and the ability to individually change the parameters of each component selected.

▪ Finally, it shall be possible to import or export custom pages using an xml format.

Cardholder Watch lists

▪ The ACS shall provide the ability to import information regarding any cardholder on a watch list from a government agency or otherwise

▪ When an operator attempts to enrol a cardholder into the ACS that matches the information already contained in a watch list, the ACS shall generate an alarm that alerts the operator that a match has been recognised and further action may be required.

This match shall include general cardholder information or may even include custom cardholder information.

ASSIGNMENT OF ACCESS

o The system shall allow an infinite number of combinations of access permissions

to be assigned to any cardholder programmed in the system. The system shall allow access permissions to be assigned to access points, areas, elevator floors and groups of any of these.

o In addition, the system shall provide the ability to schedule the times during

which cardholder access to each separately allocated resource is permitted.

o Access shall also be extended to output points, whereby a cardholder presenting

their access badge not only unlocks a door, but can also easily change the state of any output in the system.

o Upon changing or assigning access to any cardholder, the details shall be

immediately propagated to all on-line ISCs.

Access privileges shall be assignable on the following basis:

Access based upon group privileges

Access based upon individual privileges

Access based upon a temporary privilege

Access based upon offline doors

Any combination of the above

Time Schedules & Holidays

o The ACS shall allow up to 65,000 configurable time schedules to be defined.

Each time schedule can consist of up to 20 independent time periods including up to 2 holidays. For ease of configuration, the operator shall be able to select



from week days, weekends, or specify a particular day or time. The ACS shall have the intelligence to check whether the time periods are valid and not conflicting with existing credentials.

o A time schedule can be configured to include or exclude holidays. Upon

changing a time schedule record, the ACS shall immediately propagate the appropriate changes to all affected ISCs.

CARD READERS AND CARDS Card Readers shall read encoded data from the access card and transmit that data back to the ISC. The card reader or entry device should give an audible and visual indication of each read. Supported cards and technologies

▪ The system shall be compatible with all major card and access entry technologies, including (but not limited to):

• Proximity cards and readers

• Biometric readers

• Bar code cards and readers

• Magstripe cards and readers

• Wiegand cards and readers

• Smart cards and readers

• iClass cards and readers (HADP range)

• Optical cards and readers

• Transmitter and infra-red cards and readers

• Keypads and PIN pads

▪ In addition, the ACS manufacturer shall be able to provide a number of different encoded card technologies, which use sophisticated algorithms. These algorithms shall be proprietary in nature to the manufacturer, and should be sophisticated enough that they increase the security of the installation. The support for these formats will be in addition to any format perceived to be an industry standard. These shall include at least one proprietary format in each of the following:

• Bar code

• Magstripe

• Wiegand (output protocol)

• Smart Card

• RS-485

• Clock & Data Ability to produce cards with bar codes, magnetic stripes, smart cards The system shall be able to create and print either magstripe, bar code, or smart cards using an integrated printing function. When creating bar code cards the user must have the option to choose the type of barcode that suits their facility. The user should be able to specify the bar code ratios, character length and position on the card.



Ability to support multiple cards The ACS system shall support the use of 60 different card technologies. As such, each tenant within an allotted environment may bring their own card technologies with them. Ability to support MIFARE smart cards The ACS system shall support the use of MIFARE smart card technology. As such the system shall provide the ability to encode smart cards including the ability to program the following:

• Specify a custom format including length, facility, company, card number and parity.

• Program each sector / block on a MIFARE (1K and 4K byte) smart card for access control and non-access control applications

• Specify sector keys and the way in which these keys interact with the sector for the reading and writing of information

• Specify the output type and data type of the information stored on the card

• Program database information for each block / sector

• The ACS system shall also support the ability to read an entire smart (1Kb and 4Kb) card based upon a pre-configured profile. This card reading shall provide a dedicated viewing screen from which the currents contents of all blocks and sectors can be viewed on-screen.

Ability to support DES Fire smart cards The ACS system shall support the use of DES Fire smart card encoding technology. This option shall support a wide range of smart cards. The ACS shall provide the ability to encode DESFire smart cards including the ability to program the following:

• Specify a custom format including length, facility, company, card number and parity.

• Program each Application / File on a DESFire (2K, 4K and 8K) smart card for access control and non-access control applications

• Encryption Key for the smart card

• Length of data written on the card, Output format, Access Control, and the Data Type to be encoded on to the smart card.

Ability to support Custom Wiegand cards The ACS system shall support the use of proximity card technology with a custom wiegand format including the ability to program the following:

• Specify a custom format including;

o Length

o Facility Code

o Company Code

o Card number



o Revision

o Parity

• Provide a graphical means of specifying the format details

Enrolment

• It shall be possible to connect standard card readers to the ISC workstation directly using a free USB port for the purpose of automatically capturing the card details during the cardholder enrolment process.

Ability to support iClass cards and readers The ACS system shall support the use of iClass technology natively (e.g.; not just via a wiegand connection) including the ability to perform the following:

• Support for HADP iCLass readers

• Support for access control via CSN or iClass ID

• Ability to display appropriate status messages on those readers with an LCD screen

Host Event Processing The ACS shall be capable of processing events in the system as they occur, and distributing this information throughout the entire access control and security network.

Immediate propagation

▪ Changes made using the ACS software shall be automatically recorded to the ODBC compliant database and downloaded to the correct ISC(s) using the appropriate communication channel. In addition, the ACS software shall also provide the tools to manually download all appropriate database information, allowing the full initialisation of each ISC.

All database changes shall be performed while the workstation is on-line without disrupting other system operations.

▪ Changes made at the ISC equipment shall be automatically uploaded to the ACS server, to ensure system continuity. Each ISC shall be capable of reporting all changes in status, system events, and actions performed, to the ACS in real-time. These messages shall be displayed immediately in the ACS audit trail. The affect of each message must be reflected throughout the system as they occur, such as, the immediate changing of the colour of a symbol located on a site plan to indicate a change in point status.

Local event buffer The ISCs shall maintain a buffer of all events that occur locally. This buffer shall store all messages until they are uploaded to the ACS server. If the communications between the ISC and the ACS server are lost, the buffer will be retained until communications is restored, at which point all logged events shall be uploaded to the ACS server.



Database accessibility All System data must reside on a single database on the network and must be accessible in real-time to every / any system workstation. This shall allow for automatic change propagation to all workstations on the system as well as a common database to consolidate all information and allow for better disaster recovery. Real time Audit Trail The system shall log all events that occur to both an on-screen audit trail window and a retrievable database record. These events must be logged on-screen as they occur (in real-time). All system changes, alarm events, entry / exit conditions, point state changes, exception messages, miscellaneous system messages, or any information relating to the access control system in general shall be logged to this audit trail. Partitioned display data The system shall be capable of filtering all displayed audit trail messages based upon the currently ‘logged in’ operator’s assigned privileges. Only those events to which the operator has been assigned privileges will appear on-screen or any audit trail report printed whilst that operator is logged on. Operator audit trail profile

▪ The system shall allow the operator to select which information columns are displayed and which information columns are not displayed on-screen in the audit trail window. The system shall also allow the operator to change the width of any displayed audit trail column by simply using the mouse to drag the column wider.

▪ The system shall allow the operator to select the colours in which certain events are displayed in the on-screen audit trail window. The operator shall also be able to select the background colours displayed behind these entries. As a minimum, the system shall allow the following audit trail component colours to be configured:

• Alarm message text color

• Normal message text color

• Alarm message background colour

• Normal message background colour In addition, it shall be possible to display each alarm with an individual alarm color, this will allow alarms of a similar to type to be instantly recognised. History View The system shall provide the ability to switch to an audit trail history mode that allows history events to be easily searched. This view shall allow events to be searched based upon any text contained in the audit trail messages that have been recorded. Event short-cuts The system shall facilitate a quick link (short-cut) from any event appearing in the audit trail. As a minimum, there shall be a link to the cardholders and the point location relating to the audit trail event. This will enable easy access to the respective record, allowing the operator to change the details of that record, if necessary.



Dual window

▪ The ACS shall allow any operator to scroll through past events without losing the ability to monitor new events. This shall be easily achieved via a split-pane audit trail window. Both viewers shall display all events as they occur. The upper viewer shall allow the operator to scroll-back and view previous events that have occurred at the facility, but have scrolled off screen as other events are logged. The lower viewer shall display the latest logged events at all times.

▪ The two viewers shall be separated by a movable partition that allows the operator to change the viewable area by simply using the PC mouse. In addition, the system shall allow the operator to select the number of entries that are retained in each on-screen viewer at any time.

▪ Any older events that cause the viewer to exceed the configured entry limit, will be removed and must be logged to a permanently stored log-file that can be recovered by creating an audit trail report.

▪ The currently logged in operator shall also be allowed to determine the order in which events are displayed (i.e.: latest event appearing at the top or the bottom of the audit trail).

Real-time audit trail printing The ACS shall allow the system administrator to configure the type of events to print to a dedicated printer in real-time. The administrator shall have the option of selecting to print all events or only alarm events. This can be in addition to displaying the events on-screen. Filtering and Search The MMI workstation shall allow the audit trail messages displayed on-screen (in history mode) to be searched using a full text search field. In addition, should be possible to filter the displayed records. The filter options will include, but will not be limited to:

• Date and Time

• Type and Category of event

• Point Information

• Group

• Name

• Employee ID

Change Tracking

• The Audit Trail shall detail each database change made within the system, including the data that was changed and a record of the operator who made that change.

Custom Audit Trails Views The ACS shall provide the ability for an operator to create a custom Audit Trail view that includes the following features:



• The customised view should update in real time as transactions occur in the system

• Multiple custom views shall be permitted at any point in time

• Ability to filter information displayed (for example may only display messages from a select group of doors)

• An operator shall be permitted to share views (configuration of) with other ACS operators

• Ability to configure a view with special trace conditions such that any important event in the system is displayed with identifying colors. For example, whenever a specific door is unlocked a message should appear in green

• Any view shall support the configuration of multiple trace conditions at any time

• It shall be possible to print the custom view at any system printer

Advanced Alarm Management The ACS shall provide an advanced alarm management system. This system shall allow the visual and audible annunciation of alarm events as they occur, in real-time. The annunciation of an alarm shall take priority over all other system functionality to ensure the alarm is registered immediately upon occurring. Alarm annunciation

▪ The system shall provide an audible and visual annunciation of all appropriate alarm situations as they occur. Each alarm annunciation shall be configurable, so that it requires positive action to be taken by the System Operator when acknowledging it, and always appears in the foreground of the MMI.

▪ Immediately following the visual and audible annunciation of an alarm, a field shall become available where the system operator can enter comments regarding the alarm situation, and shall prevent the alarm from being cleared until an entry in this field has been made. Once entered the System Operator shall be allowed to acknowledge the alarm.

▪ In addition, pre-defined alarm responses shall be available. These responses are specific to the facility and can be selected from a drop-down list to ensure quick and efficient acknowledgement of an alarm situation, in lieu of typing a message.

▪ After an alarm has been announced, the system shall allow the operator to silence the alarm for a selected period of time. After this time period has elapsed the alarm annunciation will be regenerated.

▪ Upon an alarm being announced, the System Operator shall be provided with the facility to view an alarm queue before taking further action. Alarms with the highest priority shall be placed at the head of the queue. As a minimum the alarm queue will display the following alarm attributes:

• Priority of the alarm

• Date and Time at which the alarm occurred

• Name of the system component that caused or initiated the alarm

• Current status of the system component that caused or initiated the alarm



▪ The system shall provide the ability to outline unique emergency instructions to be specified for each type of alarm. These instructions should be displayed on request before the alarm is actioned, in order to help the Operator understand the requirements and necessary routines for clearing the alarm. These alarm instructions should be able to contain any combination text or graphics and if appropriate contain a windows video (*.avi) that can be played on request of the system operator.

▪ In addition, these instructions should appear in a dialog that allows the system operator to enter a log in relation to the alarm and acknowledge the alarm, whilst simultaneously viewing the instructions.

Visual alarm graphics The system shall be configured so that the activation of any alarm provides text and audio instructions outlining the procedures to follow in responding to the alarm, at the Alarm Monitoring Workstation and automatically calls up associated maps upon grabbing the alarm. The alarm-handling portion of the system shall provide dynamic colour alarm graphic maps. These maps shall allow the operator to respond to and clear alarms from the alarms graphics screen. The system shall allow the creation of colour graphic floor plan displays and system schematics for each piece of equipment, including card readers, inputs (monitor points), and outputs (control points) to optimise system performance, analysis and speed alarm recognition. The MMI shall allow users to access the various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection or text-based commands. The system shall allow the equipment state to be changed by clicking on the point block or graphic symbol and selecting the new state. In addition symbol colours shall be used to indicate status and change as the status of the equipment changes. Real-time, dynamic graphical maps will mean that the map screen will not have to re-paint or refresh each time a new alarm or event condition occurs. Multimedia alarming The system shall extensively integrate and use multimedia throughout the ACS. The system shall provide owner customisable voice alarm annunciation and a flashing coloured system icon for each alarm in the System. In addition, the System shall provide customisable voice instructions so that each alarm or event in the System can have both sets of text instructions and/or pre-recorded audio voice instructions. Alarm re-activation The ACS shall allow each alarm to be configured with an internal timer that re-activates the alarm annunciation if the change in status that initially caused the alarm to be announced has not been rectified. This timer shall only accompany those alarms where the status of the system component can be restored to a normal state. Alarm Queue



The ACS shall place each outstanding alarm in a queue with the highest priority alarm at the top of the queue. The alarm queue shall be able display different alarms with unique colours to allow for easy and quick identification of any outstanding alarm. In addition, each entry in the queue as a minimum, will display the alarm location, its current status, and the date and time at which the alarm first occurred. The alarm queue will also provide the ability to clear alarms when necessary. Alarm configuration

▪ The ACS shall allow each alarm to be fully configurable. As a minimum the System Operator shall be able to configure alarms in response to changes in state or messages received from the following system components:

• Access Points

• Areas or zones

• Communications

• Elevator floors

• Input points

• Output points

• Intelligent System Controller (ISC)

• Interlocked Door Groups

• External System Points

▪ As a minimum, each alarm created shall allow the operator to define the following attributes:

• Whether or not the alarm is required to be acknowledged when announced

• Alarm priority, with up to 1,000 priority alarm levels

• The colour of each alarm priority level

• Instructions to be associated with the alarm

• Sound to be played when the alarm is visually announced

• Alarm re-activation time

• State change or event that will trigger the alarm or return the system component to normal

• Description of each status

• Symbols to represent the alarm and normal status of the component on a graphical map

▪ The system shall also allow alarms to be forwarded to an alternative alarm handling solution. The methods in which alarms can be forwarded include:

• To a mobile phone using SMS

• To a pager

• Via email

• From one ACS server to another (in the same security network and communications structure) via OPC

• To an OPC (Alarm and Events) compliant system Printers



All printers can reside on the same network as the access control and security system. Dedicate printers by function The system shall be capable of configuring dedicated printers for each specific task that requires the use of printed results. As a minimum the system shall allow the following printer types to be specified:

• Audit Trail printing

• Card printing

• Plan printing

• Report printing Reports The system shall be capable of configuring a dedicated printer specifically for the task of printing audit trail, database, or operator journal reports. This facility shall provide the selection of a default printer for this task and the ability to change the printer characteristics to suit the printing requirements. Real time printing The system shall be capable of printing all audit trail entries as they occur, using a dedicated printer specifically for this task. This facility shall allow the filtering of audit trail messages that are printed, including alarm messages only or all messages. In addition, the system shall allow the printer type used to be selected, be it 132 column, 80 column, or other printer types. ID card printing The system shall support any card printer with industry standard Windows drivers. It shall support double-sided full colour printing, edge to edge printing with the additional ability to encode magnetic stripes or bar codes on cards. Plan printing

▪ The system shall be capable of configuring a dedicated printer specifically for the task of printing graphical site plans. This facility shall provide the selection of a default printer for this task including the ability to select the following type of printers:

• pen plotters

• inkjet printers

• bubblejet printers

• laser printers

• electrostatic printers

▪ The ability to change the printer characteristics to suit the operator’s requirements shall also be available.

ARCHIVING SYSTEM The system shall be capable of archiving the programmed database information, the logged audit trail data, operator journal entries, graphics, alarm sound files, alarm instructions and custom designed reports. Once archived, the system shall provide the tools required to restore this data at a later time if necessary.



Archiving medium The system shall provide the ability to select the location of the archived data, be it using a local hard drive, another hard drive located on a machine in the same computer network, a floppy drive or any other mass storage device as deemed acceptable. User-definable archiving parameters

▪ The archiving facility shall allow the operator to select what information is to be stored. When archiving database information, the operator should be able to independently or collectively select the following information for storage:

• All programmed database records

• All system graphics, including site plans, symbols, alarm instructions and drawings

• System parameters

• Operator profiles

• Cardholder images

• Reports

▪ Upon restoring the archived data, the system operator shall have the same flexibility in choosing which components are to be restored if more than one component was part of the archived file.

▪ When archiving audit trail information, the operator should be able to independently or collectively select specific dates for storage. Upon restoring the archived data, the system operator shall have the same flexibility in choosing the dates for which audit trail entries are to be restored.

In addition, the operator shall be able to choose whether to encrypt the backed audit trail data. Automatic Archive

The system shall provide the mechanisms to create an automated backup. This will allow a backup schedule to be implemented for the ACS data and will include scheduling for one off date and time, day f the week, or monthly. In addition it shall be possible to specify the type of data to be automatically archived.

REPORTING The system shall be capable of providing detailed reports regarding the information contained in the database, audit trail, or operator journals, without the need for programming skills. The system shall provide the capability for the configuration and set-up of a specific system printer for printing reports, and allow the use of network printers. The system shall also exclude those records from any report to which the currently logged in System Operator has not been assigned privileges to view. Available Reports The list of reports shall be available in a tree view sorted by functional area of the system, whereby individual report views can be easily selected and displayed within the MMI. As a minimum the system shall supply at least 50 pre-defined reports in the following functional areas:

• Alarm Information



• Hardware Components

• Time Schedules

• Groups (hardware / cardholders)

• Access Definitions

• Site Plans

• Cardholders

• Audit Trail Messages

• Event Routines

• External Devices (e.g.: CCTV)

• Holidays

• Operators

• Mustering

• Credential Profiles

• Advanced Security Programming

• Synchronization

The report view MMI shall be displayed within an independent window to the ACS main operation window so that the reporting function never takes away focus from the audit trail view or other important access control information being displayed on screen, In addition, it shall be possible to hide the tree view navigation pane to maximise the area on screen in which to view the data associated with the report selected. Report sort and filtering Once displayed, each report can be filtered and information ordered as required. The main functions that shall be available to customise the current view of a displayed report shall include as a minimum:

• Customised column view (order columns, add new columns, remove columns)

• Column order (alphabetical sort order – ascending / descending)

• Information Grouping (Group information based upon data in a column, including hierarchical grouping)

• Key word filter (filter any information in a column based on a key word including wild card characters etc.)

• Automatically size columns for the information displayed Design custom report views The system shall provide the tools necessary for the operator to create custom reports regarding information in either the audit trail or database. This customization shall allow the following selection criteria as a minimum:

• Customised report creation wizard

• Custom report name

• Report type selection (for example: cardholders)

• Selection of column information to be displayed (for example: first name, last name)

• Filtered criteria (for example: first name = John) with more than 15 different filter types (equal to, greater than, etc)



• Ability to add additional filtered criteria including logical operators (and / or / and not / or not)

• Addition of the new custom report to the tree view for easy and permanent selection

Print to reports printer The system shall provide the functionality to configure and setup individual printers for each different system task that may require printed results. This includes the ability to configure a printer specifically for the purpose of creating printed reports. In addition, the printer configuration shall allow for the setup of local or network printers for these tasks. Print reports automatically The system shall provide the tools to automatically generate reports, based upon a defined schedule without operator intervention. These automatically generated reports shall be saved to disk and can be viewed at any later time while still saved.



Print Preview It shall be possible to provide a print preview on screen with the option to change the printer settings so that the view can be customised by the operator before printing. Report Export

It shall be possible to export the data contained within a report to the following data formats:

• Microsoft Excel (.xls)

• XML (.xml)

• Tab delimited (.txt)

• Comma delimited (.csv) Report Layout

Where applicable it shall be possible to dynamically change the report layout on screen by selecting an appropriate current view. For example, when creating a report based upon cardholders it shall be possible to view layouts based upon a list, by card status, alphabetical order, grouping, or with photograph. Once selected the screen will reflect the layout chosen. Interactive Reporting

The ACS shall provide a report with an interactive functionality. As a minimum, interactive reports shall permit the following:

• Ability to create a complex report based on any information contained within the ACS

• Alternatively, it will be possible to import reports from an external source

• Each interactive report will provide the facility for a set of conditions to configured for the report information (e.g.: date > mm/dd/yyyy)

• Perform functions on any information that meets the criteria selected. These functions shall include voiding a cardholder.

• Functions shall be activated manually by right clicking or automatically upon report analysis by the ACS.

Unused Cards

The ACS shall provide a mechanism to remove unused cards from an active state in the system. The length of time which defines an unused card shall be configurable.

▪ The ACS shall allow a report to be generated that lists all cards that at the time the report was generated the cards listed were considered unused.

▪ It shall be possible to directly from right clicking on entries in the report to void any or all unused cards as seen applicable by the operator who produced the report.

▪ The ACS shall also provide the ability for unused cards to be automatically voided in the system at a regular interval (for example, on a weekly basis), without the need for operator intervention.

Scheduling

The system must provide the capability for an operator to define specific times, during which certain events and system control will occur. The system must be capable of handling at least 65,000 distinct time schedules. These schedules must be operator



customisable, so that, they can schedule events across an entire week, with up to twenty distinct time periods during that week. Primarily, the time schedules must be able to handle holidays, provide access at certain times, and schedule or permit events during the specified times. Holidays

The system must be capable of defining over 100 holiday dates in advance of them occurring. A defined holiday will override the normal timed schedules where configured and allow other system functions to behave as normal. Access per door

The system must be capable of scheduling specific times when a cardholder is permitted to access a specified door, barrier or gate. At all other times the cardholder will be prevented from gaining access at that door. By specific date & time

The system shall be capable of scheduling certain programmable events to occur on specific dates or during specific times of the day. By certain event The system shall be capable of scheduling certain programmable events to occur in response to the activation of another event or system status change. The event or status changes that trigger this response shall be configurable. ANTI-PASSBACK The system shall be capable of providing anti-passback control, whereby, a cardholder that uses their card at an entry reader must not be able to re-enter until they have first exited using the specified exit reader. The system must also be capable of operating in either a soft or hard anti-passback mode The anti-passback control should also be flexible so that cardholder’s that have violated anti-passback rules or have lost their access card can be forgiven by a system operator. Soft Anti-passback

The system shall provide the selection of a soft anti-passback mode, which permits entry at a door or barrier (to a valid cardholder) when the anti-passback rules have breached. However, the system will still generate an alarm in response to this anti-passback violation. Hard Anti-passback

The system shall provide the selection of a hard anti-passback mode, which does not permit entry at a door or barrier (to a valid cardholder) when anti-passback rules have been breached. In addition this type of breach will also generate an alarm. Peer-to-Peer Anti-passback

The system shall provide full anti-passback capabilities across multiple ISCs without the need to consult the ACS host. This will allow full anti-passback capability even when communications with the host has been lost.



In addition, peer-to-peer anti-passback operation shall provide a fail-safe mode, whereby entry or exit to a secure area will be permitted when communications between controllers has been lost. Mustering Area

The system shall provide the facility via the anti-passback functionality to designate specific mustering areas. These areas shall allow reports to be generated that display all those cardholders currently logged into that area. Area Limits

The system shall allow each area to be defined with a maximum cardholder count. Once this limit has been reached the area will be considered as being “Full”. Once the full capacity has been reached, the system shall allow:

• The prevention of further cardholders from entering the area

• The triggering of an output device, for example a “Parking Lot Full” sign Cascading Anti-passback The system shall allow single reader doors to be created within an area. These doors will not fall under normal anti-passback control, however, entry will not permitted unless the anti-passback conditions assigned to the surrounding area have been previously observed. Four Eyes Access The system shall allow an area to be nominated as a “Four Eyes” location. An alarm in a four eyes location shall be raised when a single cardholder has entered that location and resided within the location for a specified amount of time without a second or subsequent cardholder entering. A four eyes area will also allow an alarm to be raised when no cardholders reside within the location. Door Interlocking The system shall allow the configuration of a set of interlocked doors, such that opening any single door within the defined set prevents any other door from being opened at the same time, even if a valid cardholder attempts to gain entry at that door. In addition, it shall be possible define a time period once the first door has been closed, before another door in the set can be opened. Dual Custody The system shall allow the configuration of a door such that it can only be opened if two valid cardholders present their access badge at the door within a defined time period. This mode shall also allow for supervisory access (e.g.: visitor escort) and an override function based upon cardholder so that cardholders of an authorised level do not require a subsequent cardholder before entry is permitted. Clustering Finally, the system shall allow the configuration of a set of controllers in a single group for the purpose of anti-passback configuration. Whilst both local anti-passback and



global anti-passback operation shall be available, this subset allows a group of controllers to monitor anti-passback within their own cluster. This type of clustering shall also allow cardholders to maintain a current count in separate anti-passback locations. For example, when a cardholder leaves their car in the carpark the increased count because of that card remains raised, even if the cardholder enters another anti-passback area that is managed across multiple controllers. Sectors The intrusion detection shall be capable of including many sectors (detection devices) in multiple zones. Each of these zones should be able to be independently or collectively controlled by the assigned cardholders. Grace Period The system shall be capable of sounding an audible alarm during the entry or exit period, to alert the user that they can now enter or exit the detection zone without generating a nuisance alarm. This entry or exit time shall be customisable. Arming The system shall provide entry and exit devices that allow users to arm or disarm a zone (group of detection devices) as they exit or leave a facility. This entry / exit device, shall display and provide the necessary tools for the cardholder to make the appropriate selections and carry out the task of arming or disarming. ACS shall provide a dedicated device for arming and disarming that shall allow the users to visually select the areas to be changed using an LCD screen and a keypad for data entry. This same device will also communicate information back to the user by displaying messages on the device that shall notify the current status. Part Arming The system shall provide the ability to arm part of an intrusion area, such that the perimeter points become armed, but the internal intrusion points to that area remain unarmed. Duress

▪ The system shall allow cardholders to indicate whether they are requesting access under a forced or duress situation and thus communicate a potential emergency to the ACS. When such a duress action has been registered, the cardholder will be permitted access and a duress alarm will be announced on the system, without arousing suspicion.

▪ In addition, the system shall allow the configuration of a duress button, which, when triggered shall raise a visual and audible alarm at each ACS workstation.

SECURITY PROGRAMMING The ISC or the system controller shall have a Programmable logic engine allowing security programming and control. The security control shall be presented to the operator through a user-friendly graphical designer. The programmable security control shall operate like a programming logic engine running in a controller. This feature shall give the ACS operators an ability to construct logical activities using the graphical designer. The logical activities shall then be executed by the controller. The



programmable security control shall allow the operator to visually design activity programs in the system and download them to the controller. The operators shall be able to customize activities for multiple triggers, and resulting effects via the graphical designers.

As a minimum, the ACS’s security programming shall make the following features available:

• Enabling users to create and design customized, site-specific activity programs for their site, without having to contact vendors for related firmware modifications

• A Single ISC or controller shall execute multiple programmable activities simultaneously. A single programmed activity shall be executed from multiple ISC’s.

• The programmable activities shall be controlled and executed by Time Schedules

• A variety of entities like Access, Input and Output point, Access Events, Intrusion Areas, Anti-Passback areas, Workgroups, and Floors shall be supported.

• Virtual Components like flags, timers, counters shall be incorporated as triggers and effects.

Time and Attendance Recording The system shall be capable of recording the entry and exit of cardholders at designated card readers or groups of card readers.

o Once recorded the system shall allow for the export of the time and attendance

information to a third party T&A or HR application. This export shall be available in a “.CSV” or “tab delimited” format to a pre-defined file location and file name.

o In addition, the exact information contained within the export file shall be

selectable and extend to at least the following required information:

• First Name

• Last Name

• Date of record

• Time of record

• Location that the record was logged o The system shall provide the ability for a report to be generated that counts the

hours a cardholder is estimated to have been on-site.

▪ The hour counting function shall allow a count of hours from a specified date at specified readers within the ACS

▪ The hour counting function shall allow a count of hours from within a given time frame (for example, within the last week)

▪ It shall be possible to automate such a report and send this via email to a specified recipient.

▪ It shall be possible to export the report so that the information contained can be used in another third party system.



Graphical Maps

▪ The system shall allow the design, import, and construction of site plans, which can be used to visually handle alarms, control access, and generally monitor the facility. Each site plan shall be updated dynamically as the status of system components change. The symbol representing each component will automatically update in colour, alerting the operator of its change in status.

▪ The system shall provide a pre-defined library of symbols that represent the most common access control and security components. In addition, the system shall allow the operator to create their own library of symbols that represent the devices installed at the facility.

▪ The system shall provide a built-in suite of graphics tools that can be used to create or modify a site plan. As a minimum, these tools shall include:

• Import of existing site plans, including AutoCAD, bmp, jpg, wmf, tif, and most other raster type images.

• Common Windows text tools, such as alignment, font, and style.

• Colour tools to change the fill and border colour of components in a plan.

• Drawing tools, so that lines, boxes, circles, arcs, and free-hand lines can be drawn.

• Alignment tools, to align separate components in a site plan

• Shortcuts that add a button to a site plan that, when clicked, automatically open a new site plan or trigger a system action, such as opening a door.

• Grid or crosshairs that aid in the alignment and scale when creating a site plan.

• Each site plan shall have the ability to unlock a door to allow entry, control points at the click of a button, retrieve point information at the click of a button, and create shortcut buttons to other plans in the system or frequently used system commands.

• In addition, the ACS shall allow partitioning for each graphical map. This partitioning shall allow only those System Operators that have been assigned the appropriate privileges to the graphical map, to view it and control points located on that map.



Annexure-F

Indicative Commercial Bid

The indicative commercial Bid needs to contain the information listed hereunder in a sealed envelope bearing the identification – “Indicative Commercial Bid for Procurement of ______________________”. Name of the Bidder: Location : State Bank GITC(CBD Belapur)

Sr. No.

Item Quantity Rate per item

Amount in Rs.

Proportion to Total Cost of A (in %age) #

A As per Bill of Material (BOM) /BoQ (Annexure ‘C’)

B

1 Sub-Total

2. Installation/ Commissioning

3. Comprehensive warranty for Equipment, software & hardware mentioned in items above for 3 years from the go live date, including annual renewal cost, if any

4. Comprehensive annual maintenance for Equipment, software & hardware mentioned above for 3 years, including annual renewal cost, if any, after the end of comprehensive warranty.*

Sub-Total ‘A’

b. Training and Certification

Sr. No.

Item Quote (INR)

Proportion to Total Cost (in %age) #

1. Training and Certification (from OEM) for--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Sub-Total ‘B’

c. Support



Sr. No.

Item Quote (INR)

Proportion to Total Cost (in %age) #

1.

Sub-Total ‘C’

Summary of Indicative Quote: (setup)

Particulars Quote (INR)

Proportion to Total Cost of D (in %age) #

(a) Location A -- (Sub-Total ‘A’ above)

(b) Training-- (Sub-Total ‘B’ above)

(c)Support (Sub-Total ‘C’ above)

(D) Grand Total (A + B + C)**

# The ‘Proportion to Total Cost’ percentage mentioned here will have to be maintained in the final price quote also by the L1 Bidder. The percentage should be mentioned in two decimal places. Variation in the final price should not exceed +/- 5%. See illustration at the end. . Important: The price breakup of all the hardware/software components must be provided (even if the price is zero). The Bid may be rejected if the price breakup is not provided. * The amount quoted here should be for ___ years. ** This will be the Total Cost of Ownership (TCO) and should be quoted in the reverse auction.

Breakup of Taxes and Duties

Sr. No.

Item Tax 1 Tax 2 Tax 3

Mention Name of Tax

1. Equipment

2. Software

3. Hardware

4. Installation/ Commissioning

5. Training

6. Support

7. Comprehensive warranty for Equipment, software and hardware for ……. years from the go live date

7. Comprehensive annual maintenance for software and hardware for ….. years after the end of comprehensive warranty.



Grand Total

Signature Seal of Company Illustration

Particulars Indicative Price Bid Quote (INR)

Proportion to Total Cost (in %age)

L1 Price (INR)

Minimum final price should not be below (INR)*

Maximum final price should not exceed (INR)**

A B C D E F

(a) Item A 25 13.16 9.38 10.36

(b) Item B 50 26.32 18.75 20.72

(c) Item C 75 39.47 28.13 31.09

(d) Item D 40 21.05 15.00 16.58

(e) Grand Total (a + b + c + d)

190 100 75

*Computed as ‘C’ percentage of ‘D’ less 5%. **Computed as ‘C’ percentage of ‘D’ plus 5%.



ANNEXURE-G

FORMAT FOR EMD BANK GUARANTEE

To: ------------------- -------------------

Dear Sir,

EMD BANK GUARANTEE FOR NAME OF SOLUTION/ SERVICES TO STATE BANK OF INDIA TO MEET SUCH REQUIRMENT AND PROVIDE SUCH SOLUTION/ SERVICES AS ARE SET OUT IN THE RFP NO. SBI/GITC/DC & BCM/2017-18/456 DATED 18/12/2017 WHEREAS State Bank of India (SBI), having its Corporate Office at Nariman Point, Mumbai, and Regional offices at other State capital cities in India has invited Request for Procurement, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of Building Management System(BMS) , Access Control System(ACS), Surveillance (CCTV) System, Equipments / Accessories required for Integration with existing setup in Global IT Centre (GITC) as are set out in the Request for Proposal SBI/GITC/DC & BCM/2017-18/456 DATED 18/12/2017. 2. It is one of the terms of said Request for Proposal that the Bidder shall furnish a Bank Guarantee for a sum of Rs.__________/-(Rupees ___________________Only) as Earnest Money Deposit. 3. M/s. ________________________, (hereinafter called as Bidder, who are our constituents intends to submit their Bid for the said work and have requested us to furnish guarantee in respect of the said sum of Rs.__________/-(Rupees _____________________ only) 4. NOW THIS GUARANTEE WITNESSETH THAT We _____________________________ (Bank) do hereby agree with and undertake to the State Bank of India, their Successors, assigns that in the event of the SBI coming to the conclusion that the Bidder has not performed their obligations under the said conditions of the RFP or have committed a breach thereof, which conclusion shall be binding on us as well as the said Bidder, we shall on demand by the SBI, pay without demur to the SBI, a sum of Rs.__________/- (Rupees _____________________ Only) that may be demanded by SBI. Our guarantee shall be treated as equivalent to the Earnest Money Deposit for the due performance of the obligations of the Bidder under the



said conditions, provided, however, that our liability against such sum shall not exceed the sum of Rs.__________/- (Rupees _____________________ Only).

5. We also agree to undertake to and confirm that the sum not exceeding Rs.__________/- (Rupees _____________________ Only) as aforesaid shall be paid by us without any demur or protest, merely on demand from the SBI on receipt of a notice in writing stating the amount is due to them and we shall not ask for any further proof or evidence and the notice from the SBI shall be conclusive and binding on us and shall not be questioned by us in any respect or manner whatsoever. We undertake to pay the amount claimed by the SBI within 24 hours from the date of receipt of the notice as aforesaid. We confirm that our obligation to the SBI under this guarantee shall be independent of the agreement or agreements or other understandings between the SBI and the Bidder. This guarantee shall not be revoked by us without prior consent in writing of the SBI.

6. We hereby further agree that –

a) Any forbearance or commission on the part of the SBI in enforcing the

conditions of the said agreement or in compliance with any of the terms and conditions stipulated in the said Bid and/or hereunder or granting of any time or showing of any indulgence by the SBI to the Bidder or any other matter in connection therewith shall not discharge us in any way our obligation under this guarantee. This guarantee shall be discharged only by the performance of the Bidder of their obligations and in the event of their failure to do so, by payment by us of the sum not exceeding Rs.__________/- (Rupees _____________________ Only)

b) Our liability under these presents shall not exceed the sum of Rs.__________/- (Rupees _____________________ Only)

c) Our liability under this agreement shall not be affected by any infirmity or irregularity on the part of our said constituents in tendering for the said work or their obligations there under or by dissolution or change in the constitution of our said constituents.

d) This guarantee shall remain in force upto 180 days provided that if so desired by the SBI, this guarantee shall be renewed for a further period as may be indicated by them on the same terms and conditions as contained herein.

e) Our liability under this presents will terminate unless these presents are renewed as provided herein upto 180 days or on the day when our said constituents comply with their obligations, as to which a certificate in writing by the SBI alone is the conclusive proof, whichever date is later.

f) Unless a claim or suit or action is filed against us within six months from that date or any extended period, all the rights of the SBI against us under this guarantee shall be forfeited and we shall be released and discharged from all our obligations and liabilities hereunder.



Notwithstanding anything contained hereinabove:

(a) Our liability under this Bank Guarantee shall not exceed Rs……….………/- (Rupees …………………….only)

(b) This Bank Guarantee shall be valid upto ……………………….

(c) We are liable to pay the guaranteed amount or any part thereof under this Bank Guarantee only and only if you serve upon us a written claim or demand on or before ……………………

Yours faithfully,

For and on behalf of

___________________________ Authorized official.



ANNEXURE–H

PERFORMANCE BANK GUARANTEE FORMAT

(TO BE STAMPED AS AN AGREEMENT)

THIS PERFORMANCE BANK GUARANTEE AGREEMENT executed at ……..this…….day of ……….. 201 by ……………. (Name of the Bank)……….. having its Registered Office at …………….and its Branch at …………………………………………….(hereinafter referred to as "the Guarantor", which expression shall, unless it be repugnant to the subject, meaning or context thereof, be deemed to mean and include its successors and permitted assigns) IN FAVOUR OF State Bank of India, a Statutory Corporation constituted under the State Bank of India Act, 1955 having its Corporate Centre at State Bank Bhavan, Nariman Point, Mumbai and one of its offices at------------------ (procuring office address), hereinafter referred to as "SBI" which expression shall, unless repugnant to the subject, context or meaning thereof, be deemed to mean and include its successors and assigns).

WHEREAS M/s__________________________________________, incorporated under __________________________________ Act having its registered office at __________________________________ and principal place of business at __________________________________ (hereinafter referred to as “Service Provider/ Vendor” which expression shall unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof shall include its successor, executor & assigns) has agreed to Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of Building Management System(BMS) , Access Control System(ACS), Surveillance (CCTV) System, Equipments / Accessories required for Integration with existing setup in Global IT Centre (GITC) (hereinafter referred to as “Services”) to SBI in accordance with the Request for Proposal (RFP) No. SBI/GITC/DC & BCM/2017-18/456 DATED 18/12/2017.

WHEREAS, SBI has agreed to avail the Services from the Service Provider for a period of ______ year(s). WHEREAS, in accordance with terms and conditions of the RFP/Purchase order/Agreement dated……………, Service Provider is required to furnish a Bank Guarantee for a sum of Rs.__________/- (Rupees _________ only) for due performance of the obligations of the Service Provider in providing the Services, in accordance with the RFP/Purchase order/Agreement guaranteeing payment of the said amount of Rs.__________/- (Rupees __________ only) to SBI, if Service Provider fails to fulfill its obligations as agreed in RFP/Agreement. WHEREAS, the Bank Guarantee is required to be valid for a total period of _____ months and in the event of failure, on the part of Service Provider, to fulfill



any of its commitments / obligations under the RFP/Agreement, SBI shall be entitled to invoke the Guarantee. AND WHEREAS, the Guarantor, at the request of Service Provider, agreed to issue, on behalf of Service Provider, Guarantee as above, for an amount of Rs.___________/- (Rupees ___________ only). NOW THIS GUARANTEE WITNESSETH THAT

1. In consideration of SBI having agreed to entrust the Service Provider for rendering Services as mentioned in the RFP, we, the Guarantors, hereby unconditionally and irrevocably guarantee that Service Provider shall fulfill its commitments and obligations in respect of providing the Services as mentioned in the RFP/Agreement and in the event of Service Provider failing to perform / fulfill its commitments / obligations in respect of providing Services as mentioned in the RFP/Agreement, we (the Guarantor) shall on demand(s), from time to time from SBI, without protest or demur or without reference to Service Provider and not withstanding any contestation or existence of any dispute whatsoever between Service Provider and SBI, pay SBI forthwith the sums so demanded by SBI in each of the demands, subject to a cumulative maximum amount of Rs.__________/- (Rupees ____________only).

2. Any notice / communication / demand from SBI to the effect that Service Provider has failed to fulfill its commitments / obligations in respect of rendering the Services as mentioned in the Agreement, shall be conclusive, final & binding on the Guarantor and shall not be questioned by the Guarantor in or outside the court, tribunal, authority or arbitration as the case may be and all such demands shall be honoured by the Guarantor without any delay.

3. We (the Guarantor) confirm that our obligation to the SBI, under this

guarantee shall be independent of the agreement or other understandings, whatsoever, between the SBI and the Service Provider.

4. This guarantee shall not be revoked by us (the Guarantor) without prior consent in writing of the SBI.

WE (THE GUARANTOR) HEREBY FURTHER AGREE & DECLARE THAT-

(i) Any neglect or forbearance on the part of SBI to Service Provider or any

indulgence of any kind shown by SBI to Service Provider or any change in the terms and conditions of the Agreement or the Services shall not, in any way, release or discharge the Bank from its liabilities under this Guarantee.

(ii) This Guarantee herein contained shall be distinct and independent and shall be enforceable against the Guarantor, notwithstanding any Guarantee or Security now or hereinafter held by SBI at its discretion.

(iii) This Guarantee shall not be affected by any infirmity or absence or irregularity in the execution of this Guarantee by and / or on behalf of the



Guarantor or by merger or amalgamation or any change in the Constitution or name of the Guarantor.

(iv) The guarantee shall not be affected by any change in the constitution of SBI or Service Provider or winding up / liquidation of Service Provider, whether voluntary or otherwise

(v) This guarantee shall be a continuing guarantee during its validity period and the SBI can make its claim in one or more events within the total liability of the Guarantor mentioned herein.

(vi) This Guarantee shall remain in full force and effect for a period of __ years from the date of the issuance i.e. up to _________ Unless a claim under this Guarantee is made against us within three (3) months from that date i.e. on or before _____ , all your rights under this Guarantee shall be forfeited and we shall be relieved and discharged from all liabilities there under.

(vii) This guarantee shall be governed by Indian Laws and the Courts in Mumbai, India alone shall have the jurisdiction to try & entertain any dispute arising out of this guarantee.

Notwithstanding anything contained herein above:

(a) Our liability under this Bank Guarantee shall not exceed Rs……….………/- (Rupees …………………….only) (b)This Bank Guarantee shall be valid upto………………………. c) We are liable to pay the guaranteed amount or any part thereof under this Bank Guarantee only and only if SBI serve upon us a written claim or demand on or before …………………… (date which is 3 months after date mentioned at (b) above.

Yours faithfully, For and on behalf of Bank. __________________________ Authorised official



ANNEXURE-I

PROFORMA OF CERTIFICATE TO BE ISSUED BY THE BANK AFTER SUCCESSFUL COMMISSIONING AND ACCEPTANCE

OF THE SOFTWARE SOLUTION/ SERVICES

Date: M/s.--------------- ------------------------- Sub: Certificate of commissioning of Solution 1. This is to certify that the Software Solution as detailed below has/have been

successfully installed and commissioned (subject to remarks in Para No. 2) in accordance with the Contract/specifications.

a) Bid No. ._________________ dated _______________________ ___ b) Description of the Solution ________________________________ c) Quantity ____________________________________________ ____ d) Date of commissioning _____________________________________

e) Date of acceptance test _____________________________________

2. Details of specifications of Software Solution not yet commissioned and

recoveries to be made on that account: S.No. Description Amount to be recovered 3. The acceptance test has been done to our entire satisfaction and Staff have

been trained to operate the Software Solution. 4. The Vendor has fulfilled his contractual obligations satisfactorily*

or The Vendor has failed to fulfill his contractual obligations with regard to the

following: (a) (b)



(c) 5. The amount of recovery on account of non-supply of Software

Solution/Services is given under Para No. 2. 6. The amount of recovery on account of failure of the Vendor to meet his

contractual obligations is as indicated in endorsement of the letter.

Signature _______________________

Name _______________________

Designation with stamp __________________

______________________________________ * Explanatory notes for filling up the certificates: (a) The Vendor has adhered to the time schedule specified in the contract in

providing the required Solution / Manuals pursuant to Technical Specifications.

(b) The Vendor has supervised the commissioning of the Software Solution in

time i.e., within the period specified in the contract from the date of intimation by the Bank in respect of the installation of the Software Solution.

(c) Training of personnel has been done by the Vendor as specified in the

Contract. (d) In the event of Manuals having not been supplied or installation and

commissioning of the Software Solution having been delayed on account of the Vendor, the extent of delay should always be mentioned.

ANNEXURE-J



Penalties & SLA terms

1. Delivery of all equipment should be within 6.weeks from date of placing of order. In the event of the any or all equipment(s) not being delivered, installed, tested and commissioned within a period of 6 weeks from date of Purchase Order, a penalty of one (1) percent of the total cost of equipment for each week or part thereof the delay, subject to maximum amount of ten (10) percent of the total cost of equipment will be charged to vendor. This amount of penalty so calculated shall be deducted at the time of making final payment after successful installation and commissioning of Solution.

2. The Vendor warrants that the products supplied under the Contract are new, unused, of the most recent or current model and they incorporate all recent improvements in design and / or features. The Vendor further warrants that all the Products supplied under this Contract shall have no defect, arising from design or from any act of omission of the Vendor that may develop under normal use of the supplied products in the conditions prevailing in India.

3. Warranty for Hardware Components: Onsite comprehensive warranty for all the hardware components including free replacement of spares, parts, kits as and when necessary will be 36 months from date of installation or 39 months from date of delivery, whichever is earlier.

4. Warranty for the System Software/off-the-shelf Software will be provided to the Bank as per the general conditions of sale of such software.

5. The Vendor shall in addition comply with the performance guarantees specified under the Contract. If, for reasons attributable to the Vendor, these guarantees are not attained in whole or in part the Vendor shall make such changes, modifications and / or additions to the Products or any part thereof as may be necessary in order to attain the contractual guarantees specified in the Contract at its own cost and expense and to carry out further performance tests.

6. On-site comprehensive warranty: The warranty would be on-site and comprehensive in nature and back to back support from the OEM. The vendor will warrant all the Equipment, hardware and software against defects arising out of faulty design, materials and media workmanship etc. for a period of three years from the date of acceptance of the hardware and software. The vendor will provide support for Operating Systems and other preinstalled software components during the warranty period of the hardware on which these software & operating system will be installed. The Vendor shall repair or replace worn out or defective parts including all plastic parts of the equipment at his own cost including the cost of transport.

7. During the term of the contract, the VENDOR will maintain the equipment in perfect working order and condition and for this purpose will provide the following repairs and maintenance services:

a) Free maintenance services during the period of warranty. Professionally qualified personnel who have expertise in the



hardware and system software supplied by the vendor will provide these services.

b) The Bidder shall rectify any defects, faults and failures in the equipment and shall repair/replace worn out or defective parts of the equipment during working hours i.e. from 8.00 A.M. to 8.00 P.M. on all working days (viz. Monday to Saturday). In case any defects, faults and failures in the equipment could not be repaired or rectified during the said period, the engineers of the VENDOR are required to accomplish their duties beyond the said schedules in case of any situation if it warrants. In cases where unserviceable parts of the equipment need replacement, the VENDOR shall replace such parts, at no extra cost to the BANK, with brand new parts or those equivalent to new parts in performance. For this purpose the VENDOR shall keep sufficient stock of spares at Bank’s premises and at the premises of The VENDOR.

c) The maximum response time for a maintenance complaint from the site of installation (i.e. time required for Vendor’s maintenance engineers to report to the installations after a request call / fax /e-mail is made or letter is written) shall not exceed 2 hours.

d) The VENDOR shall ensure that faults and failures intimated by Bank as above are set right within 48 hours of being informed of the same. In any case the equipment should be made workable and available not later than the Next Business Day.

e) Penalties for SLA uptime shall be as under;

S. No. Uptime Range Penalty (Quarterly Basis)

1. 81-89 10%

2. 71-80 20%

3. <70 30

f) The VENDOR shall ensure that the meantime between failures (including any malfunctioning, breakdown or fault) in the equipment or any part thereof, as calculated during any and every quarter (period of three consecutive months) is not less than 90 days.

g) Preventive maintenance: the VENDOR shall conduct Preventive Maintenance (including but not limited to inspection, testing, satisfactory execution of all diagnostics, cleaning and removal of dust and dirt from the interior and exterior of the equipment, and necessary repair of the equipment) once within first 15 days of the installation once within the first 15 days of every alternate month during the currency of this agreement on a day and time to be mutually agreed upon. Notwithstanding the foregoing the VENDOR recognizes Bank’s operational needs and agrees that Bank shall



have the right to require the VENDOR to adjourn preventive maintenance from any scheduled time to a date and time not later than 15 working days thereafter.

h) All engineering changes generally adopted hereafter by the VENDOR for equipment similar to that covered by this AGREEMENT, shall be made to the equipment at no cost to the Bank.

i) Qualified maintenance engineers totally familiar with the equipment shall perform all repairs and maintenance service described herein.

j) The Bank shall maintain a register at its site in which, the Bank’s operator / supervisor shall record each event of failure and / of malfunction of the equipment. The VENDOR’s engineer shall enter the details of the action taken in such register. Additionally every time a preventive or corrective maintenance is carried out, the VENDOR’S engineer shall make, effect in duplicate, a field call report which shall be signed by him and thereafter countersigned by the Bank’s official. The original of the field call report shall be handed over to the Bank’s official.

k) The VENDOR shall provide replacement equipment if any equipment is out of the premises for repairs.

7. Any worn or defective parts withdrawn from the equipment and replaced

by the VENDOR shall become the property of the VENDOR and the parts replacing the withdrawn parts shall become the property of Bank.

8. The VENDOR’s maintenance personnel shall, be given access to the

equipment when necessary, for purpose of performing the repair and maintenance services indicated in this agreement.

9. However if Bank desires to shift the equipment to a new site and install it

thereof urgently, the VENDOR shall be informed of the same immediately. THE Bank shall bear the charges for such shifting and the VENDOR shall provide necessary arrangement to Bank in doing so. The terms of this agreement, after such shifting to the alternate site and reinstallation thereof would continue to apply and binding on the VENDOR.

10. Bank shall arrange to maintain appropriate environmental conditions, such

as those relating to space, temperature, power supply, dust within the acceptable limits required for equipment similar to that covered by this Agreement.

11. NO term or provision hereof shall be deemed waived and no breach

excused, unless such waiver or consent shall be in writing and signed by the party claimed to have waived or consented. Any consent by any party to or waiver of a breach by other, whether express or implied, shall not constitute a consent to or waiver of or excuse for another different or subsequent breach.



12. If, in any month, the VENDOR does not fulfill the provisions of clauses (b), (c), (d), (e) and (h) only the proportionate maintenance charges for that period during the month will be considered payable by Bank without prejudice to the right of the Bank to terminate the contract. In such event the VENDOR was credited without deducting the proportionate maintenance charges for that month, the Bank can deduct the same from future payments payable or the VENDOR shall refund the amount forthwith to Bank on demand by Bank.

13. On account of any negligence, commission or omission by the engineers

of the VENDOR and if any loss or damage caused to the Equipment, the VENDOR shall indemnify/pay/reimburse the loss suffered by the BANK.

14. Future additions of Equipment/ Hardware / Software: 14.1 The Bank would have the right to:

a) Shift supplied systems to an alternative site of its choice.

b) Disconnect / connect / substitute peripherals such as printers, etc. or devices or any equipment / software acquired from another vendor.

c) Expand the capacity / enhance the features / upgrade the hardware /

software supplied, either from the vendor, or another vendor, or developed in-house.

provided such changes or attachments do not prevent proper maintenance, from being performed or unreasonably increase the VENDOR cost of performing repair and maintenance service.

14.2 The warranty terms would not be considered as violated if any of (a), (b) or (c) above takes place. Should there be a fault in the operations of the system, the vendor, would not unreasonably assume that the causes lie with those components / software not acquired from them.

15. In the event of failure of the Service Provider to render the Services or in

the event of termination of agreement or expiry of term or otherwise, without prejudice to any other right, the Bank at its sole discretion may make alternate arrangement for getting the Services contracted with another vendor. In such case, the Bank shall give prior notice to the existing Service Provider. The existing Service Provider shall continue to provide services as per the terms of contract until a ‘New Service Provider’ completely takes over the work. During the transition phase, the existing Service Provider shall render all reasonable assistance to the new Service Provider within such period prescribed by the Bank, at no extra cost to the Bank, for ensuring smooth switch over and continuity of services. If existing vendor is breach of this obligation, they shall be liable for paying a penalty of as provided in Part-II, (Schedule of Events, Sl No 20) on demand to the Bank, which may be settled from the payment of invoices or Performance Bank Guarantee for the contracted period.



16. The selected Bidder will ensure the repair/replacement of the system components failed during normal operations without any additional cost to the Bank. For the purpose, Bidder will make their own arrangement for skilled manpower and necessary tools. 17. All critical spares should be warehoused at the site by the Bidder. Such spares will be kept under lock and key and the keys will be maintained with Bank in Data Centre. As and when required, bidder company’s authorized representatives will access the keys on Bank’s authorized officials approval. Bidder will carry out under noted activities during the service visits, not limited to

• Inspection of all Controls and Control Panels supplied.

• operational test of Controls and Control panels.

• Full function tests of equipment. • Submit a full-service report on the functionality of the listed

components in the installation and suggest improvements and upgrades.

Bidder should adopt standard best practices to provide support for

quick resolution for day to day maintenance issues depending on its criticality, not limited to, with

• Emergency escalation matrix . • Site Inspection

• Software patch update • Tele support

• Functionality test (Calibration of systems, etc) • Fine tuning (for Performance improvement)

18. Periodical visits during the period of the contract, The Support engineers will carry out the following tasks–

• The system would be thoroughly checked, cleaned and adjusted.

• Check the system’s errors and alarms

• Necessary inspection and maintenance of the system(s) and take necessary corrective actions

• Clean all detectors and testing of devices (Check LED indications in all modules) as per agreed schedule & and devices

• Resolve any issues regarding the system and take corrective actions for the problem(s).

• Inventory recording to help identify components for replacements or software for the latest versions / upgrade patches

• Check connectivity and communication at all terminations, replace all faulty detectors, devices, control cards of main panels, repeater panels, junction boxes, etc. installed for building management system, fire



detection system, CCTV surveillance system and access control system on failure.

• Install and re-commission defective detectors, devices and cards upon receipt of replacement on-site

• Maintain loop in and loop out connections, all call points, fuses, terminals, junction boxes used in the system

• Check all power sources and outlets used in the system. Periodicity should be as follows

Activity Schedule

Fire Alarms System (WLD, VESDA, CO2, PA Systems etc

Quarterly

CCTV, Access Control System Quarterly

Out Door Unit Detector Monthly

• Any additional visit during the period of the contract in the event of break down/malfunction of the equipment.

19.Software Update Patches In our pursuit of staying in sync with the evolving needs of new facilities, The Support releases software update patches regularly. Vendor will install these update patches on the installed systems to remove any bugs encountered during operation. And also update to ensure on compatibility of The Support systems with new versions of other software.

20.Service Report For every site visit, whether for preventive or for corrective maintenance, The Support service engineer will prepare a Service Report, signed by Vendor and the customer’s representatives. A copy of the same would be handed over to the customer and the second would be retained by Vendor.

The Service Report lists down maintenance activities carried out on the system, parts replaced or new components supplied as well as our response and resolution times – a testimony of our commitment to provide quick, efficient and effective service.

Quarterly Reports

Maintaining the health of building systems is an on-going activity, with maintenance activities scheduled at regular intervals. HAIL will submit a report on the health of the system, every quarter

21.Escalation Level and Time schedule

Escalation Level

Escalation Level Contact Details To be contacted when Service Request is not

responded within

Escalation Level Critical Non Critical

Response Time (by Phone/Mail) 2 Hours

Maximum Resolution Time 24 Hours 48 Hours



Level I Regional

Engineer

Regional Service Engineer Regional Office Address) Phone No: Mobile: E-Mail:

24 hours

Level II Regional Head

Regional Service Manager (Regional Office Address) Phone No: Mobile: E-Mail:

48 hours

Definition of Critical and Non-Critical Failures:

S.No System Critical Failures Non-Critical Failures

1 Access

Control

System

1. ACS door/s locked with

person inside protected

area. 2. Complete ACS Software

crash. 3. Issue with FAS & ACS

Integration.

1. Any other failures

which are not listed as

critical are non-critical complaints

2 CCTV

System

1. Camera is not working in

identified critical area. 2.DVR/Complete failure of

CCTV system

1. Any other failures

which are not listed as critical are non-critical

complaints

3 Intruder Alarm

System

1. Unable to arm/disarm panel.

2.Continuous annunciation.

1. Any other failures which are not listed as

critical are non-critical complaints 4 Fire Alarm

System

1.Continous annunciation.

2. Complete panel is down.

8 Building Management

System

1. Front end software crash.

2. Complete trunk failure.



ANNEXURE-K

NON-DISCLOSURE AGREEMENT

THIS RECIPROCAL NON-DISCLOSURE AGREEMENT (the “Agreement”) is

made at Mumbai between:

__________________________________ constituted under the _________ Act,

______ having its Corporate Centre at ___________________________

__________________________________ (hereinafter referred to as “Bank”

which expression includes its successors and assigns) of the ONE PART;

And

____________________________________ (hereinafter referred to as

“_________” which expression shall unless repugnant to the subject or context

thereof, shall mean and include its successors and permitted assigns) of the

OTHER PART;

And Whereas

1. _________________________________________ is carrying on business of

providing _________________________________, has agreed to

__________________________ for the Bank and other related tasks.

2. For purposes of advancing their business relationship, the parties would

need to disclose certain valuable confidential information to each other.

Therefore, in consideration of covenants and agreements contained herein for

the mutual disclosure of confidential information to each other, and intending to

be legally bound, the parties agree to terms and conditions as set out

hereunder.

NOW IT IS HEREBY AGREED BY AND BETWEEN THE PARTIES AS UNDER

1. Confidential Information and Confidential Materials:

(a) “Confidential Information” means non-public information that Disclosing Party

designates as being confidential or which, under the circumstances

surrounding disclosure ought to be treated as confidential. “Confidential

Information” includes, without limitation, information relating to installed or

purchased Disclosing Party software or hardware products, the information



relating to general architecture of Disclosing Party’s network, information

relating to nature and content of data stored within network or in any other

storage media, Disclosing Party’s business policies, practices, methodology,

policy design delivery, and information received from others that Disclosing

Party is obligated to treat as confidential. Confidential Information disclosed to

Receiving Party by any Disclosing Party Subsidiary and/ or agents is covered

by this agreement

(b) Confidential Information shall not include any information that: (i) is or

subsequently becomes publicly available without Receiving Party’s breach of

any obligation owed to Disclosing party; (ii) becomes known to Receiving

Party prior to Disclosing Party’s disclosure of such information to Receiving

Party; (iii) became known to Receiving Party from a source other than

Disclosing Party other than by the breach of an obligation of confidentiality

owed to Disclosing Party; or (iv) is independently developed by Receiving

Party.

(c) “Confidential Materials” shall mean all tangible materials containing Confidential

Information, including without limitation written or printed documents and

computer disks or tapes, whether machine or user readable.

2. Restrictions

(a) Each party shall treat as confidential the Contract and any and all information

(“confidential information”) obtained from the other pursuant to the Contract

and shall not divulge such information to any person (except to such party’s

own employees and other persons and then only to those employees and

persons who need to know the same) without the other party’s written

consent provided that this clause shall not extend to information which was

rightfully in the possession of such party prior to the commencement of the

negotiations leading to the Contract, which is already public knowledge or

becomes so at a future date (otherwise than as a result of a breach of this

clause). Receiving Party will have executed or shall execute appropriate

written agreements with its employees and consultants specifically assigned

and/or otherwise, sufficient to enable it to comply with all the provisions of this

Agreement. If the Service Provider shall appoint any Sub-Contractor then the

Service Provider may disclose confidential information to such Sub-

Contractor subject to such Sub Contractor giving the Bank an undertaking in

similar terms to the provisions of this clause.

(b) Receiving Party may disclose Confidential Information in accordance with

judicial or other governmental order to the intended recipients (as detailed in

this clause), provided Receiving Party shall give Disclosing Party reasonable

notice prior to such disclosure and shall comply with any applicable protective

order or equivalent. The intended recipients for this purpose are:



(1) the statutory auditors of the Bank and

(2) regulatory authorities regulating the affairs of the Bank and inspectors

and supervisory bodies thereof

(c) The foregoing obligations as to confidentiality shall survive any termination of

this Agreement

(d) Confidential Information and Confidential Material may be disclosed,

reproduced, summarized or distributed only in pursuance of Receiving Party’s

business relationship with Disclosing Party, and only as otherwise provided

hereunder. Receiving Party agrees to segregate all such Confidential Material

from the confidential material of others in order to prevent mixing.

(e) Receiving Party may not reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble any

software disclosed to Receiving Party.

3. Rights and Remedies

(a) Receiving Party shall notify Disclosing Party immediately upon discovery of

any unauthorized used or disclosure of Confidential Information and/ or

Confidential Materials, or any other breach of this Agreement by Receiving

Party, and will cooperate with Disclosing Party in every reasonable way to help

Disclosing Party regain possession of the Confidential Information and/ or

Confidential Materials and prevent its further unauthorized use.

(b) Receiving Party shall return all originals, copies, reproductions and summaries

of Confidential Information or Confidential Materials at Disclosing Party’s

request, or at Disclosing Party’s option, certify destruction of the same.

(c) Receiving Party acknowledges that monetary damages may not be the only

and / or a sufficient remedy for unauthorized disclosure of Confidential

Information and that disclosing party shall be entitled, without waiving any

other rights or remedies (as listed below), to injunctive or equitable relief as

may be deemed proper by a Court of competent jurisdiction.

a. Suspension of access privileges

b. Change of personnel assigned to the job

c. Financial liability for actual, consequential or incidental damages

d. Termination of contract

(d) Disclosing Party may visit Receiving Party’s premises, with reasonable prior

notice and during normal business hours, to review Receiving Party’s

compliance with the term of this Agreement.

4. Miscellaneous



(a) All Confidential Information and Confidential Materials are and shall remain

the property of Disclosing Party. By disclosing information to Receiving Party,

Disclosing Party does not grant any expressed or implied right to Receiving

Party to disclose information under the Disclosing Party patents, copyrights,

trademarks, or trade secret information.

(b) Any document provided under this Agreement is provided with RESTRICTED

RIGHTS.

(c) Neither party grants to the other party any license, by implication or

otherwise, to use the Confidential Information, other than for the limited

purpose of evaluating or advancing a business relationship between the

parties, or any license rights whatsoever in any patent, copyright or other

intellectual property rights pertaining to the Confidential Information.

(d) The terms of Confidentiality under this Agreement shall not be construed to

limit either party’s right to independently develop or acquire product without

use of the other party’s Confidential Information. Further, either party shall be

free to use for any purpose the residuals resulting from access to or work with

such Confidential Information, provided that such party shall maintain the

confidentiality of the Confidential Information as provided herein. The term

“residuals” means information in non-tangible form, which may be retained by

person who has had access to the Confidential Information, including ideas,

concepts, know-how or techniques contained therein. Neither party shall have

any obligation to limit or restrict the assignment of such persons or to pay

royalties for any work resulting from the use of residuals. However, the

foregoing shall not be deemed to grant to either party a license under the

other party’s copyrights or patents.

(e) This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with

respect to the subject matter hereof. It shall not be modified except by a

written agreement dated subsequently to the date of this Agreement and

signed by both parties. None of the provisions of this Agreement shall be

deemed to have been waived by any act or acquiescence on the part of

Disclosing Party, its agents, or employees, except by an instrument in writing

signed by an authorized officer of Disclosing Party. No waiver of any

provision of this Agreement shall constitute a waiver of any other provision(s)

or of the same provision on another occasion.

(f) In case of any dispute, both the parties agree for neutral third party arbitration.

Such arbitrator will be jointly selected by the two parties and he/she may be

an auditor, lawyer, consultant or any other person of trust. The said

proceedings shall be conducted in English language at Mumbai and in

accordance with the provisions of Indian Arbitration and Conciliation Act 1996

or any Amendments or Re-enactments thereto.

(g) Subject to the limitations set forth in this Agreement, this Agreement will inure

to the benefit of and be binding upon the parties, their successors and

assigns.



(h) If any provision of this Agreement shall be held by a court of competent

jurisdiction to be illegal, invalid or unenforceable, the remaining provisions

shall remain in full force and effect.

(i) All obligations created by this Agreement shall survive change or termination

of the parties’ business relationship.

5. Suggestions and Feedback

(a) Either party from time to time may provide suggestions, comments or other

feedback to the other party with respect to Confidential Information provided

originally by the other party (hereinafter “feedback”). Both party agree that all

Feedback is and shall be entirely voluntary and shall not in absence of

separate agreement, create any confidentially obligation for the receiving

party. However, the Receiving Party shall not disclose the source of any

feedback without the providing party’s consent. Feedback shall be clearly

designated as such and, except as otherwise provided herein, each party shall

be free to disclose and use such Feedback as it sees fit, entirely without

obligation of any kind to other party. The foregoing shall not, however, affect

either party’s obligations hereunder with respect to Confidential Information of

other party.

Dated this __________ day of _________ 2017 at __________

(month) (place)

For and on behalf of ___________________________

Name

Designation

Place

Signature

For and on behalf of ___________________________

Name

Designation

Place

Signature



ANNEXURE-L Pre-Bid Query Format

(To be provide strictly in Excel format)

Vendor Name

Sl. No

RFP Page No

RFP Clause

No.

Existing Clause

Query/Suggestions

The queries should be priority order (Top priority query should appear in 1st row like this only).



Annexure-N

Manufacturer’s Authorization Form

( On the OEM Letterhead)

No. Date:

To,

Ref: SBI/GITC/DC & BCM/2017-18/456 dated 18/12/2017

Dear Sir,

We who are established and reputable manufacturers /

producers of ________________________ having factories / development facilities at

(address of factory / facility) do hereby authorize M/s ___________________ (Name and

address of Agent) to submit a Bid, and sign the contract with you against the above Bid

Invitation.

2. We hereby extend our full guarantee and warranty for the Equipment, Solution,

Products and services offered by the above firm against this Bid Invitation.

3. We also undertake to provide any or all of the following materials, notifications, and

information pertaining to the Products manufactured or distributed by the Bidder:

(a) Such Products as the Bank may opt to purchase from the Bidder, provided, that this

option shall not relieve the Bidder of any warranty obligations under the Contract;

and

(b) in the event of termination of production of such Products, advance notification to

the Bank of the pending termination, in sufficient time to permit the Bank to procure

needed requirements; and following such termination, furnishing at no cost to the

Bank, the blueprints, design documents, operations manuals, standards, source codes

and specifications of the Products, if requested.

4. We duly authorize the said firm to act on our behalf in fulfilling all installations,

Technical support and maintenance obligations required by the contract.

Yours faithfully,

(Signature of the authorized signatory)

Name of Signatory: _____________

Designation : _________________

(Seal of the OEM)



Annexure-M

Undertaking of Authenticity To: (Name and address of Procuring Office) Sub: Undertaking of Authenticity for Equipment, Hardware & Software Supplies Ref: RFP No. SBI/GITC/DC & BCM/2017-18/456 dated 18/12/2017 With reference to the equipment being quoted to you vide our Quotation No:___________ dated ___________, we hereby confirm that all the Equipment/ components /parts /assembly / software etc. used in the devices/solutions to be supplied shall be original new components / parts / assembly / software only, from respective OEMs of the products and that no refurbished / duplicate / second hand equipment/ components /parts/ assembly / software shall be supplied or shall be used. We also undertake to produce certificate from the Original Equipment Manufacturers (if required by you) in support of the above statement at the time of delivery / installation

2. We also confirm that in respect of licensed operating systems and other software utilities to be supplied, the same will be procured from authorized sources and supplied with Authorized License Certificate (i.e. Product keys on Certification of Authenticity in case of Microsoft Windows Operating System)

3. In case of default and the Bank finds that the above conditions are not complied with, we agree to take back the equipment supplied and return the money paid by you, in full within seven days of intimation of the same by the Bank, without demur or any reference to a third party and without prejudice to any remedies the Bank may deem fit.

4. In case of default and we are unable to comply with above at the time of delivery or during installation, for the equipment/ IT Hardware / Software already billed, we agree to take back the devices/equipment without demur, if already supplied and return the money if any paid to us by you in this regard.

5. We also take full responsibility of both parts & Service SLA as per the content even if there is any defect by our authorized Service Centre / Reseller / SI etc.

Dated this ....... day of ............................ 201 ______________________________________________________________ (Signature) (Name) (In the capacity of) Duly authorised to sign Bid for and on behalf of